Drive and Control Components for Hoisting Gear. Catalog HE

Transcription

1 s Drive and Control Components for Hoisting Gear Catalog HE 999 COMPONENTS

2 Motors and units for variable-speed drives are included in the following catalogs: DA DC Motors for Variable-Speed Drives... SIMOREG Chassis Converters DA for Variable-Speed DC Drives... SIMOREG Static Converters Systems DA for Variable-Speed DC Drives... SIMOVERT PM Modular Converter Systems DA 45 for Multi-Motor Drives... SIEMOSYN Motors DA 48 Synchronous Motors for Variable-Speed AC Drives... SIMOVERT A Current-Source DC Link Converters DA 6 for Variable-Speed AC Drives... MICROMASTER Voltage-Source DC Link Converters, DA 64 MIDIMASTER for Variable-Speed AC Drives... SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Voltage-Source DC Link DA 65 Converters for Variable-Speed AC Drives... SIMOVERT P Voltage-Source DC Link Converters DA 66 for Variable-Speed AC Drives... SITOR Semiconductors-Protection Fuses DA 94 for Variable-Speed Drives... SIMADYN D Control System DA 99

3 s Drive and Control Components for Hoisting Gear Catalog HE 999 Supersedes:Catalog H 986 Catalog H 987 Catalog H3 993 Summary Motors SystemComponents Switchgear and Control Equipment T300 Technology Software for Cranes HIPACanti-sway Control Appendix A

4 Warning! The technical data are intended for general information. Please observe the operating instructions and the references indicated on the products for installation, operation and maintenance. All product designations used are trade-marks or product names of Siemens AG or other companies. The technical data, selection and ordering data (order numbers), accessories and availability are subject to alteration. All dimensions in this catalog are stated in mm. Siemens AG 999

5 Summary / Motors / Power electronics / Resistor units / Technology module / Control components / Swing control Siemens HE. 999 /

6 Summary Motors Three-phase drives with slipring motors Subject Catalog Slipring motors LT9/LT8 Slipring motors with brake LV9 HE HE Power electronics SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller 6GA 465 HE Resistor units Wire resistor units 3PP Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 HE Technology module Control components! Control monitors! Contactors! Crane control units! Switches SIMOMAT control monitor 6GA 465 Contactors Crane control unit 3SJ9 Master controller 3SJ3 Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 HE HE /NS K HE HE HE Swing control / Siemens HE. 999

7 Summary Three-phase drives with squirrel cage motors DC motors Subject Catalog Subject Catalog Squirrel cage motors LA Squirrel cage motors LD9/LD8 with fitted brake Three-phase servomotors PA6 M HE DA 65.3 DC motors GG5/6, H.5 DA DA. Converters SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES 6SE70/7 DA 65.0 SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters DA DA. T 300 technology module Software modules for hoisting gear technology Contactors Crane control unit 3SJ9 Master controller 3SJ3 DA 65.0 HE NS K HE HE T 300 technology module Software modules for hoisting gear technology Contactors Crane control unit 3SJ9 Master controller 3SJ3 DA 65.0 HE NS K HE HE HIPAC swing control 6GA7 HE HIPAC swing control 6GA7 HE Siemens HE. 999 /3

8 Machines / Summary of types and ratings / Summary / Applications / Technical explanations / Standards and regulations /3 Foreign regulations /3 General technical data /6 Motor design /0 Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 /0 Technical features and applications / Electrical design / Mechanical design /5 Environmental conditions and special versions /8 Selecting and ordering data /7 Dimension drawings /36 Spare parts /37 Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake /37 Technical features and applications /38 Electrical design /38 Mechanical design /39 Brake design /40 Environmental conditions and special versions /4 Selecting and ordering data /45 Dimension drawings /48 Spare parts /49 Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake /49 Technical features and applications /49 Electrical design /50 Mechanical design /5 Brake design /55 Environmental conditions and special versions /56 Selecting and ordering data /60 Dimension drawings Siemens HE. 999 /

9 Machines Summary of types and ratings Summary Motor types LT9 LT8 LV9 LD9/8 Designation Three-phase slipring motor Three-phase slipring motor Three-phase slipring motor with integral DC-operated disc brake Three-phase squirrel cage motor with fitted DC-operated disc brake Degree of protection IP 54 (optionaily IP 55) IP 54 (optionaily IP 55) IP 54 IP 54 Cooling Method Surface cooling Surface cooling Surface cooling Surface cooling Size 00 L to 00 L 5 M to 35 L 00 L to 00 L 3 S to 5 M Power range in KW (S3-40%) Rated torque range.5 to 9 kw 5 to 00 Nm /8 0 to 35 kw 46 to 00 Nm /9.5 to 9 kw 5 to 00 Nm /4 7.3 to 6.5 kw 49 to 407 Nm /55 Selecting tables on page ff. Applications Siemens hoisting gear motors are particularly suitable for harsh hoisting duty and operation outdoors. These rugged motors have a high degree of protection to withstand adverse ambient conditions reserves of torque allowing high shock loads and they are specially optimized for high torque on high-inertia drives. Three-phase slipring motors LT and LV have higher magnetization to achieve a higher stalling torque have greater banding to allow a higher overspeed test speed are also suitable for operation with stator phase-angle control have degree of protection IP54 with open water drain holes to allow any condensate developing inside the motor to flow out. Technical explanations Standards and regulations The motors listed in this catalog comply with the regulations for rotating electrical machines and the German industrial standards (DIN), particularly DIN EN and IEC 34. Title DIN IEC Applies to machines type VDE Slipring rotor LT9/8 Slipring rotor LV9 Squirrel cage rotor LD9/8 Rated operation and characteristic data for rotating electrical machines Terminal designations and direction of rotation for electrical machines DIN EN /.95 DIN VDE 0530, T Types of rotating electrical machines DIN EN Methods of cooling of rotating electrical machines DIN EN Degrees of protection of rotating electrical machines DIN VDE Surface-cooled three-phase motors for intermittent DIN duty: mounting dimensions Conical shaft ends for electrical machines DIN 448 Cylindrical shaft ends for electrical machines DIN 748, T3 7 Integral thermal protection 34- Mounting flanges for electrical machines DIN Vibration severity of rotating electrical machines DIN EN Noise emission, limit values DIN VDE 0530, T Regulations for electromagnetic equipment DIN 0580 Cylindrical roller bearings DIN 54 (Radial) deep-groove ball bearings DIN 65 (Radial) angular-contact ball bearings DIN 68 / Siemens HE. 999

10 Machines Technical explanations Foreign regulations On account of the largely implemented adaptation of national regulations to international Recommendation IEC 34-, there are no longer any differences in the countries listed in the table for coolant temperatures, classes of insulating materials and temperature rise limits (determined from the increase in resistance). Our motors are therefore perfectly suitable for operation at the power ratings of DINEN60034specifiedinthis catalog, in the area of validity of these standards. With regard to other operating data and types of motors in the listed countries, information should be requested. Country National regulation Belgium NBN 7 NBNC 5-0, 976 Denmark DS500/958 France NFC 5 NFC 5-00 United Kingdom BS 5000 BS 4999 India IS 35/978 IS 47 Italy CEI -3, V/974 CEI -3 Canada CSA C. No Netherlands NEN 373/977 Norway NEK Sweden SEN 60 0/974 Switzerland SEV 3009/966 General technical data Testing, quality assurance, approval Type testing is conducted on If required, type test new series of motors. In batch certificates or routine test manufacture, each motor is certificates can be issued. subjected to a routine test. (This must be specified on the Within the scope of quality order.) assurance, the motors are subjected to intermediate tests during manufacture. Types according to DIN EN Hoisting gear motors are Information should be primarily used in types IM B 3, requested in such cases. IM B 5, IM V and IM B 35; however, they can be supplied as other types. The approval of motors by the customer or his agent involves additional expense because each motor has already been subjected to normal testing. The approval conditions must be specified on the order (fully clarified) because the over- The individual catalog sections provide information on the listedtypesofthevariousmotor series. head and billable costs are based on this. DIN EN Code I DIN EN Code II IM B 3 IM B 35 IM B 5 IM V IM V 5 IM V 6 IM B 6 IM B 7 IM B 8 IM V 3 IM 00 IM 00 IM 300 IM 30 IM 0 IM 03 IM 05 IM 06 IM 07 IM 303 DIN 4 90 old B 3 B 3/B 5 B 5 V V 5 V 6 B 6 B 7 B 8 V 3 Siemens HE. 999 /3

11 Machines Technical explanations General technical data Insulation The insulation extensively protects the winding from the effects of corrosive gases and vapors as well as dust, oil and increased air humidity. It withstands the vibration stress and ambient conditions encountered in hoisting gear duty. Temperature classes DIN EN contains classifications into temperature classes for winding insulation, including impregnating material; certain overtemperatures are assigned to these classes. For all insulating material classes, the power data of the motors are uniformly based on a coolant temperature of 40 C at a site altitude of up to 000 m above sea level. The individual catalog sections contain information on permissible power outputs at different ambient conditions. Temperature rise limit in K with temperature class B F H Balance quality Dynamic balancing The rotors of the hoisting gear motors are dynamically balanced with half featherkey to EN , according to vibration severity level N. In the event of particular demands for balance quality, versions with lower vibration are available at extra cost (please inquire). Motors with fully keyed balancing are available as special versions (please inquire). The type of balancing is indicated as follows: Shaft front of the LT9 or rating plate of the LT8, marked H for half keyed balancing, and F for fully keyed balancing. Vibration severity The vibration severity is the root mean square (RMS) value of the vibration rate (frequency range from 0 to 000 Hz). However, a motor balanced according to the standard can vibrate more severely on site. The possible causes could be as follows: Uneven foundation Reaction from the driven machine Parts whose natural frequency is close to the frequency of residual unbalance of the motor. In such cases, each element of the installation must be verified and not only the motor itself. The following table shows the limit values for electrical machines to DIN EN Vibration severity levels Speed range Limit values of vibration severity V rms (permissible deviation +0 %) over the frequency range 0 to 000 Hz for sizes 00 to to 5 50 to 35 rpm mm/s mm/s mm/s mm/s N (Normal) 600 to R (Reduced) 600 to 800 >800to S (Special) 600 to 800 >800to /4 Siemens HE. 999

12 Machines Technical explanations General technical data Bearings, shaft ends, coupling Bearings All motors are equipped with rolling bearings. A high-temperature grease is normally used for lubrication. Motors with cylindrical roller bearings are dispatched with a rotor shipping brace to avoid the formation of scoring in the drive end bearings during transportation and down times. Shaft ends The normal versions of hoisting gear motors have a shaft end which may be conical or cylindrical according to motor type and size. The motors are always delivered with inserted featherkey. Coupling The normal versions of hoisting gear motors are designed for coupling drive. With pinion, chain or belt drive, higher lateral forces and bearing stress are developed and require particular attention. Conical shaft ends are more suitable than cylindrical ones for the transfer of high transient torques, in particular, because they ensure firm seating of the coupling on the shaft end. With conical shaft ends, the featherkey is only intended to offer additional security. In normal operation, it is not required to take up forces because the torque is transferred entirely via the conical seat. Theboreofthecouplinghalf should always be machined according to a taper gage, withthesmallestborediameter being about 0. to 0.6 mm smallerthandiameterd or d 3 of the shaft end. When the coupling half is pushed onto the shaft end, thefrontisatadistanceof about -6 mm from the shaft shoulder. This ensures that the shoulder nut does not reach the thread end during tighteningsothatfirmseatingonthe shaft is achieved. Couplings are usually tightened in the cold state. The coupling hub is pushed on axially and widened to such an extent that the required frictional locking for torque transfer is ensured. No particular torque or gage is required. Motor protection Hoisting gear motors are operated in intermittent duty with increased power utilization. Excessive loading, an undervoltage in the supply, excessive cyclic duration factor, too high a coolant temperature or reduced heat removal (speed too low on self-ventilated motors) result in a temperature rise in the windings and overheating of the motors. The motors can be directly and indirectly protected against overheating. A good monitoring concept should take all factors into account. In the case of indirectly acting protection equipment such as circuit breakers, overload relays or I² t monitors, it should be noted that they can only partly detect the causes of overheating in intermittent duty. The most reliable method is the direct sensing of excessive overtemperatures at their point of origin - the machine windings. All the possible causes and their effects are thus detected with only one means. PTC thermistor detectors incorporated in the windings increase their resistance suddenly when the response temperature is exceeded. A tripping unit (Catalog NSK) detects the change and intervenes in the control system with a contact. Another detector loop to emit a warning signal below the shutdown temperature can be useful in critical-stage production, in order to end initiated work cycles. Siemens HE. 999 /5

13 Machines Technical explanations Motor design Twocriteriamustbetakeninto account when designing motorsforhoistinggeardrives (high-inertia drives): The required maximum torque (starting torque) The rated power (thermal power capacity of the motor). The torque test establishes whetherthemotorcandevelop the required maximum torque, for acceleration processes for example. The maximum permissible torque is greater than the rated torque and is often specified as a multiple of rated torque. An adequate safety margin from the stalling torque should be ensured. When designing for output power, the rated power of the motor is adjusted to the effective power requirement of the drive. The rated power of a motor is governed by the motor temperature. This is affected by the mode of operation and the thermal behavior of the motor. For this reason, the rated data of a motor differ for the various modes of DIN EN They are usually specified for one or more of the following modes: Continuous duty S (also correspondingtointermittent duty S3-00 %) Short-time duty S Intermittent duty S3. Intermittent duty modes S4 and S5 are so varied that specifications can only be made under clearly defined boundary conditions. The modes are defined according to DIN EN Symbols used in formulae: P Load or power output of the motor P v Power loss of the motor ϑ e Final temperature, steady-state temperature ϑ max Maximum winding temperature in the relevant mode ϑ mean Mean steady-state temperature t e Operating time t p Idle time t S Cycle time T L Thermal time constant of the running motor T St Thermal time constant of the stationary motor Continuous duty (S) Definition Explanation A mode with constant loading, whose duration is sufficient to reach the thermal steadystate. The operating time t e of the motor must be greater than 3xT L for the thermal steadystate to be reached. The rated power of the motor for continuous duty should be designed so that the final temperature ϑ e is the same as the permissible winding temperature. The start is deliberately discounted under the assumption that a single high-inertia start will not result in final temperature. The length of a subsequent idle time is insignificant. However, high-inertia starting with a warm motor requires particular attention, as do successive starts. Restrictions or a request for information may be necessary. /6 Siemens HE. 999

14 Machines Technical explanations Motor design Short-time duty (S) Definition Explanation Duty with constant loading which, however, does not last long enough for the thermal steady-state to be reached, followed by an interval lasting until the motor temperature deviates not more than K from the coolant temperature. Here, the operating time t e must be less than 3 x T L because the theoretical final temperature must not be reached. The rated power of the motor and the operating time are adjusted to each other so that the maximum winding temperature ϑ max does not exceed the permissible values. Here too, the start is deliberately discounted because it is assumed that the motor is starting from the cold state and the starting process is short with respect to operating time t e. The rated power of the motor for short-time duty can be higher than for the same motor in continuous duty, but the permissible operating time must be specified. The shorter the operating time, the higher is the rated power of the motor. Values recommended for operating times are 0, 30, 60, 90 minutes (see also Section Selecting and ordering data for Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 ). Thesubsequentidletime must be long enough for the motortocooltoambient temperature again, that is t P 3xT St otherwise the permissible temperature would be exceeded with the next cycle of the same kind. Intermittent duty without the effect of the starting process (S3) Definition Explanation A mode comprising a sequence of cycles of the same kind, each of which covers a time with constant load and an interval, whereby the starting current does not significantly affect temperature rise. (The cycle duration is generally so shortthatthethermalsteadystate is not reached.) Here too, the operating time must be t e <3xT L because the theoretical final temperature ϑ e must not be reached. However, the subsequent interval t p is less than 3 x T St, so that the ambient temperature is not reached. A mean steady-state value ϑ mean develops, around which the temperature varies but is below the theoretical final temperature ϑ e. The rated power of the motor in intermittent duty is higher than in continuous duty. Time constants T L and T St may differ. This affects the rated power in intermittent duty and is taken into account in the S3 motor tables. Proper selection of a motor therefore requires knowledge of the operating and idle times, in addition to the required power during the operating time. They are given by the cycle duration (total time) and the cyclic duration factor (CDF) in % of cycle duration. If the cycle duration is not specified, the value applying is 0 minutes according to DIN EN The S3 motor tables are based on this. The values recommended for the CDF are 5, 5, 40 and 60 %. Effect of different cycle times The S3 rated power is designed so that the temperature peaks ϑ max at a cycle time of 0 minutes comply with the permissible values (see section a in adjacent figure). Shorter cycle times are not critical because lower temperature peaks occur at the same mean winding temperature ϑ mean (see section b in adjacent figure). Since higher temperature peaks are reached with a greater cycle duration (see section c in adjacent figure) and they shorten the life of the insulation, information should be requested. The starting processes are not discounted in S3 duty; the standard assumes that they have no significant effect on temperature rise. As long as this standard condition is met, any number of cycles per hour are permissible. Siemens HE. 999 /7

15 Machines Technical explanations Motor design Intermittent duty with effect of the starting process (S4) Intermittent duty with effect of the starting process and electrical braking (S5) Definition A mode consisting of a sequence of cycles of the same kind, each of which comprises a noticeable starting time, a time with constant load - and with S5 a time of fast electrical braking - as well as an interval. J A J 5 J J ) J J A J 5 J L L J J A = A = 0 - # # 0 - # $ ) ) J Intermittent duty S4 J Intermittent duty S5 J Explanation These modes are similar to S3 operation but additionally comprise temperature rise resulting from the start and any electrical braking. This additional power loss depends on the accelerating torque and the time during which this takes place; that is, from the linear and rotating masses to be accelerated (kinetic energy). The moved masses must therefore be known. They are given by the moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft. Data also required are how often and during which time the masses must be accelerated and braked. With hoisting gear drives, the significance of acceleration for motor design rises as the number of cycles per hour increases, that is, short travel or hoisting heights. Thefollowingdataaretherefore required for the accurate design of a motor for switching modes S4 and S5, apart from the steady-state power: Cyclic duration factor External moment of inertia Acceleration or accelerating torque Acceleration time Number of cycles per hour. This means that general power specifications for motors in S4/S5 duty are not possible; these can only be referred to certain conditions of the driven machine (external moments of inertia) and mode (cycles, cyclic duration factor). Additionally, for hoisting gear drives, there is no constant load over several cycles, but collective loading. /8 Siemens HE. 999

16 Machines Technical explanations Motor design Effective value calculation, cyclic duration factor The actual duty can also be converted to a thermally equivalent S3 duty with an effective value calculation, allowing the S3 motor tables to be used again. A torque diagram (cycle diagram) must be available to make the calculation (see adjacent Fig.). The effective torque is defined as the quantity which, when assumed to be constant over the operating time -wouldresult in the same temperature rise as the torque actually developed. The cyclic duration factor is the sum of operating times referred to the total cycle time. If the individual travel cycles are not identical, for example on account of different loads or different travel, travel cycles must be incorporated in the effective value and CDF calculation until the travel cycles are repeated. The different thermal behavior of the running and stationary motor is already taken into account for the relevant CDF in the S3 tables. For this reason, the calculation of M rms must be referred to the operating time t E and not to the cycle time t S. To satisfy the definition, however, poorer cooling of the motor in certain operating phases must also be taken into account, for example during correction travel at slow speeds and with self-ventilated motors. These influencing factors can only be taken into account by the motor manufacturer. Furthermore, the operating conditions of hoisting gear and running gear are very different: With running gear, the external moment of inertia referred to the motor moment of inertia is usually greater than for hoisting gear, that is, with the same number of cycles and the same cyclic duration factor, the acceleration and braking of running gear has greater significance than for hoisting gear. With hoisting gear, the steady-state torque (load torque) referred to the rated torque of the motor is usually greater than for running gear (travel resistance). With running gear, the torque diagram is independent of the direction of travel (without wind forces). The influence of the useful load is low with high running gear weights, i.e. with a loading and unloading crane it is repeated after every travel, and at the latest after the second travel. With hoisting gear, the torque diagram is significantly governed by the load. The motor torques for hoisting and lowering the same load are different (efficiency) and, with a loading and unloading crane, a travel cycle with load is usually followed by a travel cycle with empty load lifting equipment (collective loading, see also FEM, Section I, Calculation Principles for Cranes); i.e. the cycle required for the effective value calculation is repeated at the earliest after the fourth travel. M rms = CDF ΣM t t E t E 00 Cyclic duration factor % t s M,M,M 3 Torque values of the travel diagram t,t,t 3 Operating times of torque values M,M,M 3 t P Idle time (interval) t E Operating time of the motor = t +t +t 3 t S Cycle time = t E +t P Torque diagram Typical torque diagram for running gear over one conveying cycle Typical torque diagram for hoisting gear over one conveying cycle Siemens HE. 999 /9

17 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Slipring motor LT9 Slipring motor LT8 Technical features and applications Hoisting gear drives, particularly for cranes, are subjected to very high torque utilization during acceleration. Additionally, voltage dips must be expected in the acceleration phases. A high stalling torque is therefore of decisive importance for safe crane operation. Hoisting gear motors LT8 and LT9 are specially designed for intermittent duty and are characterized by rugged design high stalling torque high resistance to extreme climates. DIN 4 68 requires a relative stalling torque of at least.-times the rated torque; SEB requires at least.5-times the rated torque at 40 % CDF. The relative stalling torques of Siemens hoisting gear motors are significantly above these values. They are largely met even at 5 % CDF which means that great safety for crane operation is ensured under overloads and during voltage dips. All hoisting gear motors are suitable for operation with stator phase-angle control. The tacho-generator needed for speed measurement can be fitted on the non-driving end of the motors. The following Fig. shows the design of the slipring motor LT8, sizes 5 M to 35 M. Housing 7 Terminal box End-shield 8 Fan 3 Flanged end-shield 9 Fan cowl 4 Frame foot 0 Slipring contact system 5 Rotor Service cover 6 Bearing assembly /0 Siemens HE. 999

18 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Electrical design Normal winding Abnormal winding Tolerances PTC thermistor detectors The hoisting gear motors from Motors are manufactured with Siemens are delivered with a an abnormal winding (at extra normal winding for the follow- cost) for operating voltages ing rated voltages: between 380 V and 690 V, 3-phase,50Hz,380V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz which are out- 400 V, 500 V, 660 V, 690 V side the above values. The technical data at 50 Hz then 3-phase,60Hz,460V. correspond approximately to Motors with a winding for 3- the catalog data for motors phase, 50 Hz, 380 V or 400 V with a normal winding. At 60 may also be connected to Hz the rated power changes systems with 3-phase, 60 Hz, to about 0 % of rated pow- 440 V or 460 V; they may then er at 50 Hz. Further technical be operated at up to 0 % of data for 60 Hz are available on the 50 Hz power output. The request. speed varies in proportion to the frequency and rotor standstill voltage in the ratio 440 V / 380 V or 460 V / 400 V. The torque overload capability does not vary (see also the Selecting and ordering data). According to DIN EN In their normal version, the LT the following deviations from motors are delivered without rated data are permissible: temperature detectors. If de- Slip ± 0% sired, three or six temperature detectors for warning and/or Stalling torque 0% shutdowncanbefittedinthe in the Moment of inertia ±0 %. stator winding of these motors. With all motors, the terminals Insulation for the temperature detectors are in the terminal box. The normal version of the stator and rotor windings is in temperature class F. According to DIN EN , the stator windings are tested at a voltage of x V N V but at least 500 V. The rotor windings of hoisting gear motors are tested at fourtimes the rotor standstill voltage V. Terminal box With all hoisting gear motors, the terminal box is arranged at the top of the normal version. A side arrangement is possible up to size 00L. The terminal box of the LT motors has cable entry holes ononesideonly,butcanbe rotated by 80 with fixed terminals. In the normal version, the cable entries are on the right, viewed from the drive end.allterminalboxescomply with degree of protection IP 55. Specially marked terminals are provided for the protective conductor. Motor type Threaded Inlet thread Threaded Inlet thread terminal bolt in DIN terminal bolt in DIN Stator Stator Rotor Rotor Cable inlet Additional equipment LT9 07 M5 PG 3.5 M5 PG 3.5 PG 9 + PG 7 LT9 3 LT9 4 LT9 33 M6 PG 6 M6 PG 6 PG 9 + PG 7 LT9 34 LT9 35 LT9 63 M8 PG 9 M8 PG 9 PG 9 + PG 7 LT9 66 LT9 86 LT9 06 LT9 07 M0 PG 4 M0 PG 4 x PG LT8 3 M8 PG 36 M8 PG 36 PG 3.5 LT8 4 LT8 53 LT LT8 54-6/8/0 M0 PG4 M8 PG4 PG3.5 LT8 80 LT8 83 LT8 30 M0 PG48 M8 PG4 PG3.5 LT8 33 LT8 34 LT8 35 LT8 37 ) LT8 38 ) M Encapsulated gland M0 PG36 PG3.5 ) Version for 0/380 V /Y or 30/400 V /Y not available With the LT8 motors, two additional PG 3.5 holes can be provided if required. If, for example, a motor with PTC thermistors and anti-condensation heating is ordered, the terminal box is automatically given two PG 3.5 holes. Siemens HE. 999 /

19 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Electrical design Sliprings and brushgear Motor type Positioning Accessibility Cover Brushgear Slipring material LT LT9 07 At non-drive end in From above, rotatable Cast iron -arm clamp-type Cast bronze pot-type end-shield 90 later brush holder LT8 3 - LT9 33 At drive end, integrated From above Cast iron Box-type brush holder Brass in cast-metal housing LT LT8 38 At non-drive end in pot-type end-shield From above Cast iron -arm clamp-type brush holder Brass Mechanical design Types Complying with DIN EN , flanges to DIN Except in basic types IM B3 and IM B5, hoisting gear motors of sizes up to 35 M can be operated in mounting positionsimb6,imb7,imb8, IMV5andIMV6orIMV. However, the mounting arrangement must be specified without fail on the order, on account of the location of condensate drain holes for example. They are, therefore, normally only marked on the rating plate of the basic type. Where motors upwards of size 80 with foot-mounting are mounted on the wall, the motor feet must be supported. Hoisting gear motors of sizes 35 L and above can only be supplied in types IM B3, IM B35 and IM V. All types with the shaft end at the bottom require a canopy. For type IM V, the canopy is provided as standard. If a basic type IM B3 or IM B5 is used in a different mounting position, attention must be paid to the location of condensate drain holes; the endshield should be rotated if necessary. Condensate developing in the interior of the motor must be able to flow out through the condensate drain holes. Housing feet The bottom of the feet is machined; tolerances are given in the dimension tables. Shaft ends In their normal version, the hoisting gear motors are supplied as follows: LT9 up to size 60 with a cylindrical shaft end to DIN 748 ) LT9 from size 80 with a conical shaft end to DIN 448 ) LT9 with a conical shaft end to DIN 448 ). Other shaft ends, to DIN 4 68 for example, are available on request. Conical shaft ends have a pitch of :0, a threaded journal and are delivered with hexagon nut and spring washer. On all motors, the non-drive shaft end face is accessible and suitable for speed measurement. The motors in basic types IM B3 and IM B5 are also available with two shaft ends. Tacho mounting In the case of drive controllers with control range, a tachogenerator can be fitted to the non-drive end of the motor to measure the speed. The tacho-generator is secured on the fan cowl. In such cases a fan cowl of cast material is used. The following tacho-generators are fitted as preferred types: To motors of sizes 00 to 00 GMP.0 S-4, type IM B 5 S V N =00Vat 000 rpm I N = 00 ma Brush quality H 73 Degree of protection IP 55 To motors of sizes 5 to 35 GMP.0 S-4, type IM B 5 N V N =00Vat 000 rpm I N =00mA Brush quality H 73 Degree of protection IP 55. If a different tacho-generator is to be fitted, information should be requested. Tacho-generators are provided by the factory. ) Conical shaft end available at extra cost ) Cylindrical shaft end available at extra cost / Siemens HE. 999

20 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Mechanical design Degree of protection to DIN VDE Hoisting gear motors are mainly operated in intermittent duty S3. In this mode, there is a very great risk of condensation developing in the interior of the motor, especially when it is operated outdoors. The condensate must be able to flow out. For this reason, the following degrees of protection are specified for the normal versions of hoisting gear motors: Motor housing IP 54 with open water drain holes Terminal box IP 55. Higher degrees of protection are possible (IP 55 at extra cost) but cannot be recommended for motors operating in intermittent duty, because of the formation of condensation in the interior of the motors. Where flange motors are to be fitted to gearing without intermediate housing and without coupling, an oil seal is needed at the flange end-shield. If this seal is not fitted on the gearing side, the motor must be ordered accordingly. With the LT9 motors, a radial sealing ring is then used at the drive end shield. If nothing relating to installation with gearing is indicated on the order, it is assumed that a coupling will be used for power transmission. Maximum permissible speed The maximum permissible operating speed is specified in the technical data / selecting tables. In compliance with DIN EN , the motors are subjected to an overspeed test of.-times this speed for two minutes. Hoisting gear motors are also available in a special version forhigheroperatingspeeds (on request). Water drain holes (condensate drain holes) Hoisting gear motors in de- In degree of protection IP 55 gree of protection IP 54 have the water drain holes are al- water drain holes (condensate ways sealed. On motors of drain holes) to prevent water this degree of protection, the from collecting in the interior. water drain holes must be opened in a regular maintenance cycle to allow the condensate collecting in the interior of the motor to flow out. Mechanical balance quality Rating plates The rotors of the hoisting gear motors are dynamically balanced with inserted half featherkey, according to vibration severity N (normal). In the case of special demands for balance quality, the rotors can also be balanced according to other stages of vibration severity (see page /4). Fitted to the housing or fan cowl of the Siemens hoisting gear motors is a rating plate of high-grade steel on which the rated data of the motor are specified. The LT9 motors are fitted with an international rating plate; the LT8 motors have bilingual rating plates in German/English. By agreement, rating plates with other language combinations or in a single language can also be fitted (at extra cost). The following are specified in the normal case: Operating voltage Type Degree of protection IP 54 Rated power Rated current Rated speed Rotor current. The rated power, current and speed are specified for S3-5, -5, -40, -60, -00 % CDF. If a higher degree of protection or class of insulating material is required, this is specified accordingly. Replaceability of older types of motor In general, motors LT9 and Location of the terminal LT8 can replace motors of boxes older type. Since, however, Foot dimensions and axle various standards have heights changed in the course of time, it is advisable to compare the Shaft ends technical data and mounting Characteristic rotor resist- dimensions in individual cases. ance k The following points should be observed in particular: u k = i 3 Adaptation to older types is possible with special versions within limits. u Rotor standstill voltage i Rotor current. Siemens HE. 999 /3

21 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Mechanical design Bearings All hoisting gear motors are equipped with commercial rolling bearings of the following standard series: Deep-groove ball bearings 6..C3, DIN C3, DIN 65 Cylindrical roller bearings NU..., DIN 54. The bearings of the LT9 motors are greased for life. For particular operating conditions, a regreasing device can also be fitted (option). A hightemperature long-term grease is used for lubrication. The bearings installed are listed in the table in Section Bearing assignments of motors LT9. Cylindrical roller bearings are installed for drives with increased lateral forces. In all cases, the bearing seal complies with the ordered motor degree of protection. The normal versions of LT8 motors have bearings of dimension series 03 with permanent lubrication. The bearing play is C3 for all deepgroove ball bearings, and normal for cylindrical roller bearings. A regreasing device can be fitted to the motors for special operating conditions, such as coolant temperature of more than 55 C. A hightemperature grease is used for bearing lubrication. A regreasing device is possible on all motors at extra cost. For drives with which high lateral forces are developed (for example, pinion drive with crane rotators) cylindrical roller bearings are installed instead of the deep-groove ball bearings on the drive end of LT8 motors with an unchanged end-shield. The bearing seals of all motors comply with degree of protection IP 54, with the bearing sealed from the exterior by a V ring. For installation in a corrosive environment, corrosion protection may be required (on request). Measuring nipples can be fitted to the end-shield of the LT8 motors to monitor the bearings with the surge pulse measuring method (SPM). Rolling bearings Bearing assignments of motors LT9 In the normal versions, the bearings for hoisting gear motors LT9 and LT8 are designed for coupling output. The bearings for motors up to size 33 are greased for life; from size 34 upwards they have a regreasing device. Motors up to size 33 can be delivered with a regreasing device if desired (option). Type Drive end bearings V-ring Non-drive end bearings LT9 normal ) reinforced ) 07 3/4 606 Z C Z C3 NU 06 C3 NU 306 C3 606 C C3 33/34/ C3 NU 308 C C3 63/ C3 NU 309 C C C3 NU 3 C3 630 C3 06/ C3 NU 33 C3 63 C3 V-ring Fig. See Section Sizes 00 to 3 See Section Sizes 60 to 00 Sizes 00 to 3 Motors of sizes 00 and have locating bearings as standard, with retaining rings to DIN 47 and DIN 47, at the non-driving end. With size 3 the locating bearing is positioned in the end-shield hub at the non-driving end by abearingcover. ) For coupling output ) For increased lateral force /4 Siemens HE. 999

22 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Mechanical design Sizes 60 to 00 The bearing assignments serve only for planning purposes; binding specifications relating to bearings on motors already supplied may be requested by quoting the serial number. Bearing assignments of motors LT8 Motor type No. of poles Drive-end bearing V ring Non-driving end bearing V ring Fig. LT8 Drive-end bearing Non-drive end bearing 3 4, 6, 8 NU 33 EJ 65 A 63 C3 60 A 4 4, 6, 8 NU 33 EJ 65 A 63 C3 60 A 53 4, 6, 8, 0 NU 35 EJ 75 A 633 C3 65 A , 8, 0 NU 35 EJ NU 36 EJ 75 A 80 A 633 C3 634 C3 65 A 80 A 80 4, 6, 8, 0 NU 37 EJ 85 A 634 C3 70 A , 8, 0 NU 37 EJ NU 37 EJ 85 A 85 A 634 C3 634 C3 70 A 70 A , 6, 8, 0 4, 6, 8, 0 4, 6, 8 4, 6, 8 4, 6, 8 4 NU 39 EJ NU 39 EJ NU 30 EJ NU 30 EJ NU 30 EJ NU 30 EJ 95 A 95 A RB 00 ) RB 00 ) RB 00 ) RB 00 ) 636 C3 636 C3 637 C3 ) 637 C3 ) 637 C3 ) 637 C3 ) 80 A 80 A 85 A 85 A 85 A 85 A The bearing assignments serve only for planning purposes; binding specifications relating to bearings on motors already supplied may be requested by quoting the serial number. Fig. Fig. Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Environmental conditions and special versions Ventilation Coating to RAL 7030 The hoisting gear motors have an external fan at the nondrive end which blows cooling air, irrespectively of the direction of rotation, over the housing through the fins distributed over the circumference. In the normal version, radial fans made of thermoplastic are used. For ambient temperatures of > 60 C, radial fans made of ductile cast iron are used. On all sizes, the fan cowl is made of sheet steel. When speed monitoring equipment (tacho-generators) are fitted, the motors are provided with cast-metal fan cowls. Good heat removal is achieved with special fan design and optimum cooling air channeling over the finned housing, even at speeds under the rated speed. The normal coating to RAL 7030 is suitable for installation indoors and outdoors in temperate climates. A special coating is needed for climatic regions with extreme conditions such as continuous, high air humidity or a chemically corrosive atmosphere. A special coating must also be applied when long-term storageoutdoorsisexpectedand protection from the rain is not possible. A special surface protection can also be applied, by agreement, for unusual ambient conditions (option). )Gammaring ) For vertical types Q 37 Siemens HE. 999 /5

23 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Environmental conditions and special versions Coating to RAL 7030 Version Suitability for climatic group to Heat resistance Compound (silumin parts are only given a finishing coat) with IEC publication 7-- Primer Finishing coat Normal coating Moderate Up to size 00 forindoorandoutdoorinstallation Short-term: up to 00 % rel. humidity at temperatures up to +30 C Short-term: +0 C Base: alkyde resin or CN amino resin Base: nitro-combination From size 5 Base: polyurethane Continuous: up to 85 % rel. humidity at temperatures up to +5 C Continuous: +00 C Special coating Worldwide for outdoor installation Short-term: up to 00 % rel. humidity at temperatures up to +35 C Short-term: +40 C Base: alkyde resin or CN amino resin Up to size 00 Base: epoxy From size 5 Base: polyurethane ( coats) Continuous: up to 98 % rel. humidity at temperatures up to +30 C Additionally: for corrosive atmosphere of up to % acid plus alkaline concentration or in protected rooms with permanent dampness Continuous: +0 C Anti-condensation heating Hoisting gear motors subjected to varying temperatures and air humidity outdoors, can additionally be equipped with anti-condensation heating to prevent water condensation in the stationary state. Anti-condensation heating is also recommended where motors are operated at low temperatures. The anti-condensation heating must not be switched on during operation. The adjacent table shows the heat output of the anti-condensation heating. For motors LT9/LT8 Size 00 L to M 3 M to 60 L 80 M to 00 L 5 S to 50 M 80 S to 35 L Supply voltage V 5 or 30 5 or 30 5 or 30 5 or 30 5 or 30 Heat output W Climatic resistance LT9 and LT8 The version for increased anticorrosion protection can also be decontaminated. Thedataapplytoanti-corrosion protection; additionally, the temperature limits applying to electrical machines should be observed. Climatic regions Climatic group Normal version AandT to DIN 5009 Moderate to IEC 7-- Version with increased anti-corrosion protection HandM to DIN 5009 Worldwide to IEC 7-- Radio interference In general, the hoisting gear motors with slipring rotors comply with radio interference level N to DIN VDE 0875 which is adequate for installation in industry and residential areas. /6 Siemens HE. 999

24 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Environmental conditions and special versions Temperature and site altitude According to DIN EN 60034, the rated power outputs for intermittent duty (S3-5, 5, 40, 60 and 00 %) apply at a frequency of 50 Hz, coolant temperature (KT) of 40 C and a site altitude of up to 000 m above sea level. For different conditions, the permissible power output must be determined accordingtothefollowingtables.it should be noted that this only relates to the power output, that is, thermal utilization of the motor. The useful values of torque (locked-rotor torque, stalling torque) are unaffected in their absolute amount and still comply with the values in the selecting tables. For the design ratings of hoisting gear motors, this means that the following factors must definitely be taken into account if the drive motor was selected according to effective torque, but more rarely if the locked-rotor torque was the decisive quantity. Effects of coolant temperature At site altitudes of up to 000 m above sea level and with coolant temperatures other than 40 C, the factors of Table apply to the permissible power output as a function of temperature class. ForKT0toKT35,acorrection of the temperature rise limit to DIN EN is thus agreed. KT C P perm. /P N Effects of site altitude If the motor is to be operated at a site altitude between 000 m and m and the maximum coolant temperature is not established, the following is assumed: The reduced cooling resulting from the altitude is compensated for by a reductioninmaximum ambient temperature below 40 C. This assumption is valid if the coolant temperatures of the adjacent table, as a function of site altitude and temperature class, are not exceeded. The motors can be operated with their rated power according to the catalog. Under the assumption that the coolant temperature is 40 C even at greater site altitude, the factors of Table in section Effects of coolant temperature apply to permissible power output. Altitude m KT max. C atp=p N Effects of coolant temperature and site altitude If the coolant temperature is Altitude m not given with a specified site altitude of more than 000 m Permissible power/ above sea level, the values rated power of the table in the section Effects of site altitude are With a greater reduction in always taken as a basis. power output for the reasons If the coolant temperatures mentioned, the operating values also become less favor- differ from this table, the factors of the table in the section able on account of the partial Effects of coolant tempera- load utilization of the motors; ture and in the adjacent table at power reductions of more should be multiplied for the than 5 %, therefore, motors permissible power output. with an abnormal winding Coolant temperature and site should be ordered. altitude are rounded off to 5 Cand500m. Siemens HE. 999 /7

25 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 500 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 3000 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LT Size 00 L M M 3 M 3 M 3 M 60 M 60 L 80 L 00 L 00 L 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % /8 Siemens HE. 999

26 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 500 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 00 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LT ) 35-4 ) 37-4 ) 38-4 ) Size 5 M 50 M 50 M 80 S 80 M 35 S 35 M 35 M 35 M 35 L 35 L 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % )Trans-standardmotors Siemens HE. 999 /9

27 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 000 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 500 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LT Size 00 L M M 3 M 3 M 3 M 60 M 60 L 80 L 00 L 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % /0 Siemens HE. 999

28 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 000 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 080 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LT ) 35-6 ) 37-6 ) Size 5 M 5 M 50 M 50 M 80 S 80 M 35 S 35 M 35 M 35 M 35 L 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % ) Trans-standard motors (larger trans-standard motors available on request) Siemens HE. 999 /

29 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 750 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 875 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LT Motor type LT Size 60 L 80 L 00 L Size 5 M 5 M 50 M 50 M 80 S 5 Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ± Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % / Siemens HE. 999

30 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 750 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 875 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LT ) 35-8 ) 37-8 ) Size 80 M 35 S 35 M 35 M 35 M 35 L 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % ) Trans-standard motors (larger trans-standard motors available on request) Siemens HE. 999 /3

31 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 600 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 500 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LT Size 50 M 50 M 80 S 80 M 35 S 35 M 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0% Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0% Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0% Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0% Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0% Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % Trans-standard motors (0-pole) available on request /4 Siemens HE. 999

32 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Legend for order numbers Place in the order number L A Z L A Z Size Number of poles Voltage and frequency 50Hz 380 V 400 V V V V 6 60Hz 460 V 8 Other voltage and/or frequency ) 9 Type IMB3 0 IMB5 IMB35 6 IMV(withcanopy) 4 Special version ) Z ) Option: order code LY and text ) Please specify the desired version with its order code or in plain text according to table overleaf Siemens HE. 999 /5

33 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Additional ordering data for special versions of motors LT9 and LT8 LT9 / LT8 Version For explanation see page Order code and/or text Higher coolant temperatures or site altitude ) /7 KT... C (round off to 5 or alt.... m above sea level (round off to 500 m) specify desired power output Motor protection by PTC thermistor ) with 3 integral temperature sensors for warning with 3 integral temperature sensors for shutdown with 6 integral temperature sensors for warning and shutdown / A0 A A Abnormal cable entry / Rotation of terminal box by 80 K85 Terminal box on right side Terminal box on left side / K09 K0 (only possible up to size 00 L) Second normal shaft end 3 ) / K6 Radial sealing ring at drive end for flange types 4 ) (sizes 00 to 35) /4 K7 Reinforced bearing at drive end up to size 80 SPM measuring nipple from size 5 /4 K0 G50 Anti-condensation heating for 30 V for 5 V /6 K45 K46 Fitted tacho-generator GMP.0 s-4, IM B5 / G37 Coating: /5 Normal coating in colors other than RAL 7030 Special coating in color RAL 7030 Special coating in color other than RAL 7030 Y53 K6 Y54 - and additional text: Normal coating RAL... - and additional text: Special coating RAL... Regreasing device /4 K40 Degree of protection IP 55 /3 K49 Example Hoisting gear motor LT8 75 kw at S3-40 % 80 Four-pole, 500 rpm 4AA 3-phase 50 Hz, 400 V 4 Type IM B 3 0 Marking for special version Z Order code for anti-condensation heating for single-phase, 50/60 Hz, 30 V This order number uniquely specifies the version of the hoisting gear motor: LT8 80-4AA40 - Z K45 { K45 ) Additional cost will only be billed with a power reduction of > 5 %; for motors with abnormal winding, the extra cost is already taken into account. ) See Catalog NSK for corresponding tripping unit. 3 ) Withmotorsfromsize80Mofverticaltype,thetransferabletorquemustbecalculated(onrequest) 4 ) Not possible for type IM V 3 - /6 Siemens HE. 999

34 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Selecting and ordering data Power outputs of the LT9 motors in S duty Size Order No. Rated power outputs of motors LT9 in intermittent duty S at at at 500 rpm 000 rpm 750 rpm for for for 30 min 60 min 90 min 30 min 60 min 90 min 30 min 60 min 90 min kw kw kw kw kw kw kw kw kw 00 L LT M LT LT M LT LT LT M LT L LT L LT L LT LT Power outputs of the LT8 motors in S duty available on request. Dimension drawings Certified dimensions Dimension symbols according to DIN 4939 With the types given below, the specified dimensions are certified for all listed versions. Type Certified dimensions In the normal versions, the shaft ends of motors up to size 60 are cylindrical in compliance with DIN 748, and those from size 80 upwards IM B 3 a, b, h, s, w,d,l,t,u are conical in compliance with DIN 448. IM B 5 b,e,i,s,d,l,t,u IM B 4 IM V IM B 35 a, b, b,e,h,i,s,s,w,d,l,t,u Tolerances of dimensions The adjacent tolerances apply to dimensions a, b, e and h giveninboldprintinthe dimension tables. Keyways and featherkeys (bold dimensions t, t,uand u ) are manufactured to DIN 6885 (Sheet ). Dimension Dimension Tolerance aandb up to 50 mm ± 0.75 mm over 50 mm to 500 mm ±.0 mm over 500 mm to 750 mm ±.5 mm e up to 00 mm ± 0.5 mm over 00 mm to 500 mm ± 0.5 mm over 500 mm ±.0 mm h upto50mm 0.5mm over 50 mm.0 mm Siemens HE. 999 /7

35 ! Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Dimension drawings Classes of fit The shaft ends given in the dimension tables and the diameter of the locating wheel are manufactured to the following classes of fit: Bores of couplings and pulleys should have a minimum class of fit to ISO-H7. Cylindrical shaft ends have a locating thread to DIN 33, sheet. Dimension ISO class of fit to DIN 748, DIN 760, DIN 76 and DIN 4948 dandd up to mm diam. j 6 over mm diam. k 6 over 50 mm diam. m 6 b up to 30 mm diam. j 6 over 30 mm diam. h 6 Shaft end diameter Thread up to 30 mm M 0 over 30 to 38 mm M over 38 to 50 mm M 6 Hex. nuts on conical shaft ends for standard versions of motors (shoulder nuts) Dimension Corresponding spring washer Form B d 4,d 5 c d 8 e m s DIN 7 M30x M36x3 M4x M48x3 M56x4 M64x M7x4 M80x Dimension drawings LT9 Type IM B 3 G I! 0 - # # = I # K K C @ " #? F ) J J I " M A = K! M! - O A > E= C = O F F I I % I > B J J /8 Siemens HE. 999

36 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Dimension drawings Dimension drawings LT9 For motor Dimension symbols according to Size Type DIN a b c e f g g h k k v p q s ) s 3 w w IEC B A HA BB AB AC H L LC HB HD K K C CA 00 L LT M0 xpg M LT9 3 LT M0 xpg M LT9 33 LT9 34 LT M0 xpg M 60 L LT9 63 LT M xpg L LT M xpg L LT9 06 LT M6 xpg For motor Cylindrical shaft ends, drive end 3 ) Cylindrical shaft end, non-drive end Size Type DIN d l t u s 4 d l t u s 5 IEC D ) E ) GA ) F ) DA ) EA ) GA ) F ) 00 L LT M M0 M LT M M0 LT9 4 3 M LT9 33 LT9 34 LT M M 60 M LT M M6 60 L LT L LT M M6 00 L LT9 06 LT M M0 For motor Conical shaft ends, drive end 4 ) Conical shaft end, non-drive end Size Type DIN d d d 4 l l t u s 6 d d 3 d 5 l l 3 t 3 u 3 s 7 IEC 80 L LT M30x M M30x M0 00 L LT9 06 LT M36x M M36x M ) Through-hole for bolt ) Symbol is only specified for cylindrical shaft ends 3 ) Conical shaft end for sizes 00 to 60 on request 4 ) Cylindrical shaft end for sizes 80 and 00 abnormal Siemens HE. 999 /9

37 = Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Dimension drawings Dimension drawings LT9 Type IM B 5 and IM V 6 O F A 8 M EJD? = F O G I! 0 - # $ = A B I " E? - O A > E= C = O F F I I $ I @ " C K K ) C C J K! J I B D A I : " # " #! 0 A F = JJA H J = " BH = " # J J For motor Dimension symbols according to Size Type DIN a b c e f S z g g g i k k k ) q s 3 IEC P N LA M T S Z AC LE L LC LM K 00 L LT xpg3.5 M LT xpg3.5 LT9 4 3 M LT9 33 LT9 34 LT xpg6 60 M LT xpg9 60 L LT L LT xpg9 00 L LT9 06 LT xpg4 ) ForversionIMVwithcanopy /30 Siemens HE. 999

38 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Dimension drawings Dimension drawings LT9 For motor Cylindrical shaft ends, drive end ) Cylindrical shaft end, non-drive end Size Type DIN d l t u s 4 d l t u s 5 IEC D ) E ) GA ) F ) DA ) EA ) GA ) F ) 00 L M LT9 07 LT9 3 LT M0 M M0 M0 3 M LT9 33 LT9 34 LT M M 60 M LT M M6 60 L LT L LT M M6 00 L LT9 06 LT M M0 For motor Conical shaft ends, drive end 3 ) Conical shaft end, non-drive end Size Type DIN d d d 4 l l t u s 6 d d 3 d 5 l l 3 t 3 u 3 s 7 IEC 80 L 00 L LT9 86 LT9 06 LT M30x M M30x M0 ) Conical shaft end for sizes 00 to 60 on request ) Symbol is only specified for cylindrical shaft ends 3 ) Cylindrical shaft end for sizes 80 and 00 abnormal Siemens HE. 999 /3

39 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Dimension drawings Dimension drawings LT8 3 - LT8 33 IM B # % I M = M * A IM B 35? 0 - # & I B I M = M * A & N " #! IM V * F K K H G ) N H D? > A H C J J > B G ) N ) G N C F > B ) H C H I & N " #! 0 - # ' = > B? A F = + E? = I D = BJ ) 0 - # 6 = F A H J J ) 0 - # 6 = F A H /3 Siemens HE. 999

40 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Dimension drawings Dimension drawings LT LT8 38 IM B 3 ) 0 - # I M = M * A IM B 35 ) = > 0 - #! = I? I = M * M A & N " #! IM ) G N D? A C F H H C F K K H H G ) N J J > B G ) N B M > B ) H C H I & N " #! 0 - # ' = > B? A F = 6 A H E = > N M EJD A? = F I K = = > A C + E? = I D = BJ N C!! ) 0 - # # H ) 0 - # 6 = F A H J J ) 0 - # 6 = F A H Siemens HE. 999 /33

41 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Dimension drawings Size Type No. of Toler- Toler- Toler- Toler- poles ance ance ance ance DIN a a b b b c c d d d d e e f f g h h IEC B P A N - HA LA D - DA - BB M AB T AC H - 5 M LT8 3 4,6, h m6 55 m M LT8 4 4,6, h m6 55 m M LT8 53 4,6,8, h m6 60 m M LT h m6 60 m M LT8 54 6,8, h m6 60 m S LT8 80 4,6, h m6 65 m S LT h m6 65 m M LT h m6 65 m M LT8 83 6,8, h m6 65 m S LT h m6 70 m S LT8 30 6,8, h m6 70 m M LT8 33 4,6,8, h m6 70 m M LT8 34 4,6, h m6 70 m M LT8 35 4,6, h m6 70 m L LT8 37 4,6, h m6 70 m L LT h m6 70 m Size Type No. of DIN poles k k l l m m n o p(i)b 3 p(ii) B3 p(i) p(ii) q r(i) r(ii) r s s IEC L LC E EA BA - AA - HD - HD K S 5 M LT8 3 4,6, Pg 36 Pg M LT8 4 4,6, Pg 36 Pg M LT8 53 4,6,8, Pg 36 Pg M LT Pg 36 Pg M LT8 54 6,8, Pg 4 Pg S LT8 80 4,6, Pg 4 Pg S LT Pg 4 Pg M LT Pg 4 Pg M LT8 83 6,8, Pg 4 Pg S LT Pg Pg S LT8 30 6,8, Pg Pg M LT8 33 4,6,8, Pg Pg M LT8 34 4,6, Pg 48 9 Pg M LT8 35 4,6, Pg 48 9 Pg L LT8 37 4,6, Pg 48 9 Pg L LT Pg 48 9 Pg 36 8 Note: Pg = conduit thread /34 Siemens HE. 999

42 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Dimension drawings Size Type No. DIN t t u u w w A A Bl x (I) x (II) x z (I) z (II) z Hole of poles pattern IEC GA GC F FA C CA M LT8 3 4,6, M LT8 4 4,6, M LT8 53 4,6,8, M LT M LT8 54 6,8, S LT8 80 4,6, S LT M LT M LT8 83 6,8, S LT S LT8 30 6,8, M LT8 33 4,6,8, M LT8 34 4,6, M LT8 35 4,6, L LT8 37 4,6, L LT Notes: ndshaftendfordirectcouplingonly Bl = Minimum clearance for air intake I Terminal box for screwed gland DIN II Terminal box with encapsulated cable gland Locating holes in shaft end DIN 33-DS from d = 55 mm M from d = 60 to d = 70 mm M6 up to d = 80 mm M0 from d = 90 mm M4 Size Type No. DIN d d d d3 l l l l3 t t u u of poles IEC D DA - - E EA - - GA GC F FA 5 M LT8 3 4,6, M4x3 M36x M LT8 4 4,6, M4x3 M36x M LT8 53 4,6,8, M48x3 M4x M LT M48x3 M4x M LT8 54 6,8, M48x3 M4x S LT8 80 4,6, M56x4 M4x S LT M56x4 M4x M LT M56x4 M4x M LT8 83 6,8, M56x4 M4x S LT M56x4 M48x S LT8 30 6,8, M64x4 M48x M LT8 33 4,6,8, M64x4 M48x M LT8 34 4,6, M64x4 M48x M LT8 35 4,6, M64x4 M48x L LT8 37 4,6, M64x4 M48x L LT M64x4 M48x Notes: ndshaftendfordirectcouplingonly Conical shaft ends DIN 448 Siemens HE. 999 /35

43 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 Spare parts Motor type LT9 Order No. Brush holder Carbon brushes Slipring assembly set = 3 per motor set = 6 per motor 07 LY7 70 LY8 80 LY LY7 7 LY8 8 LY LY7 7 LY8 8 LY LY7 73 LY8 83 LY LY7 74 LY8 84 LY LY7 75 LY8 85 LY9 95 Motor type LT Number of poles 4 6, 8 6, 8 4, 6, 8, 0 4 6, 8, 0 4, 6 4, 6 8, 0 8, 0 4, 6 4, 6 8, 0 8, 0 4, 6, 8 4, 6, 8 4, 6, 8 4 Order No. Box-type brush holder Carbon brushes set=3 set = Slipring assembly /36 Siemens HE. 999

44 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Technical features and applications Applications Hoisting gear motors LV9 with integral disc brake allow space-saving assembly of the drive unit. The DC-operated single-disc brake is integrated in the motor and forms with it an enclosed unit. The singledisc brake, arranged as a Version holding brake, has thermal reserves and can execute emergency stops from full motor speed. Since it is a failsafe brake, its spring energy remains fully effective even after a failure of the energizing voltage. The design of the LV9 motors is the same as that of the LT9 motors in the section Threephase slipring motors LT8 and LT9 (page / ff.), except for the brake components. The brakes are DC-operated and can be directly connected to the single phase 50/60 Hz of the motor operating voltage. The required bridge rectifier is permanently installed in the terminal box of the motor. The brake is fitted to the nondrive end of the motor and the motor shaft extends through the brake. The rated braking torque and the air gap are adjusted upon delivery. The brake linings are free from asbestos. Product range The products cover the power range from.5 kw to 9 kw in S3-40 % and braking torques of 60 Nm to 50 Nm. Further data and information on the following are the same as for the LT9 motors in the section Three-phase slipring motors LT8 and LT9 (page / ff.): Motor winding, tolerances Rating plates Sliprings Brush holders, brushes Rolling bearings Water drain holes Coating Power output, effects of temperature and site altitude Power output in S duty Anti-condensation heating for motors. Siemens HE. 999 /37

45 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Electrical design Operating voltage The LV9 hoisting gear motors with integral disc brake are available from the catalog for the following normal voltages: Motor voltage 3-phase 50 Hz 380 V 3-phase 50 Hz 400 V 3-phase 50 Hz 500 V 3-phase 50 Hz 660 V 3-phase 50 Hz 690 V 3-phase 60 Hz 460 V Brake voltage Single-phase 50/60 Hz 0 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 30 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 90 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 380 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 400 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 65 V Terminal box, conductor connection The connecting leads of the The bridge rectifier for the integral disc brake are routed brake is also accommodated through the motor housing in the terminal box. into the terminal box of the motor, to separately arranged terminals. Thermistor protection To protect the stator winding from excessive temperature rise, three or six temperature sensors for warning and/or shutdown can be fitted. Mechanical design Types Degree of protection The motors are available in the following basic types: IMB3, IMB5and IM V with canopy. Other types are possible if requested. The normal design of the LV9 brake motors complies with degree of protection IP 54. As with the LT motors, the motor section can also be supplied in IP 55. Mounted tacho-generator Shaft ends The brake motors are available with a mounted DC tachogenerator to indicate the speed and direction of rotation. It is fitted on the nondriveendofthemotor. In their normal version, the motors are supplied as follows: LV9uptosize60with a cylindrical shaft end to DIN 748 ) LV9 from size 80 with a conical shaft end to DIN 448 ) Other shaft ends, such as to DIN 468, are available on request. ) Conical shaft end available at extra cost ) Cylindrical shaft end available at extra cost /38 Siemens HE. 999

46 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Brake design View of the standard integral brake Cap screw to DIN 93 and 69 Solenoid 3 Armature 4 Setting ring 5 Compression spring 6 Hub 7 Lining 8 Second friction surface 9 Adjuster 0 Manual release Braking torque adjustment Mechanical brake release The braking torque is adjusted to the rated torque at the factory. It can be changed by turning the setting ring (4). If the braking torque M B is changed, all the closing and release times for the brake specified in the table Operating values of the spring-operated brake with DC energizing, rated supply voltage single-phase 50/60 Hz (page /40) also change. To allow releasing of the brakes in the event of an operating voltage failure, all brakes can be equipped with a mechanical, manual brake release if required. (This must be indicated on the order with order code K8.) The manual release cannot be retro-fitted. Thermistor protection Anti-condensation heating Insulation None is needed for the brake solenoid. It can continuously pass its rated current without developing an excessively high temperature. No anti-condensation heating is available for the brakes integrated as standard. The insulation of the energizing winding of the brakes complies with temperature class B (standard). Siemens HE. 999 /39

47 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Brake design Operating values of the spring-operated disc brake with DC energizing, rated supply voltage single-phase 50/60 Hz Motor Disc brake Size Type Type Torque Friction per cycle Closing time with DC/AC shutdown Release time Power consumption Moment of inertia of the brake J M rated Adjustable from to Nm Nm Nm J ms ms W kgm² 00 L LV9 07-@@D@@ / x 0-3 M LV9 3-@@D@@ LV9 4-@@D@@ M LV9 33-@@D@@ / x 0-3 LV9 34-@@D@@ LV9 35-@@D@@ M LV9 33-@@A@@ / x 0-3 LV9 34-@@A@@ LV9 35-@@A@@ M LV9 63-@@A@@ / x L LV9 66-@@A@@ M LV9 63-@@B@@ / x L LV9 66-@@B@@ L LV9 86-@@B@@ / x L LV9 06-@@B@@ LV9 07-@@B@@ / x 0-3 Environmental conditions and special versions Climatic resistance The brake motors can be used under the following conditions: Normal version Climatic AandT region to DIN 5009 Version with increased anti-corrosion protection HandM to DIN 5009 The version with increased anti-corrosion protection can also be decontaminated. Thebrakeshavethefollowing finish: Armaturediscmadeof stainless steel. The data apply to anti-corrosion protection; apart from this, the temperature limits generally applying to electrical machines should be observed. Climatic group Moderate to IEC 7-- Worldwide to IEC 7-- Climatic class J,J,J3,F to Siemens standard SN 9070 A and F to Siemens standard SN 9070 /40 Siemens HE. 999

48 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 500 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 3000 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LV Size 00 L M M 3 M 3 M 3 M 60 M 60 L 80 L 00 L 00 L 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % Siemens HE. 999 /4

49 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 000 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 500 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LV Size 00 L M M 3 M 3 M 3 M 60 M 60 L 80 L 00 L 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm M k /M N ±0 % Rated current at 400 V A Rotor current i A Char. rotor resistance k Rotor standstill voltage u V Moment of inertia J kgm² Net weight approx. kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +0 % Rotor standstill voltage approx. +5 % Rotor current approx. 5 % Characteristic rotor resistance k approx. +0 % /4 Siemens HE. 999

50 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Selecting and ordering data Legend for order numbers Place in the order number L Z Size Number of poles Version Normal With increased anti-corrosion protection A B Brake design Discbrake00Nm Discbrake50Nm Discbrake60Nm A B D Voltage and frequency 50Hz 380 V 400 V V V V 6 60Hz 460 V 8 Other voltage and/or frequency ) 9 Type IMB3 0 IMB5 IMV(withcanopy) 4 Special version ) Z ) Option: order code LY and text ) Please specify the desired version with its order code or in plain text according to table overleaf Siemens HE. 999 /43

51 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Selecting and ordering data Additional ordering data for special versions of motors LT9 and LT8 LV9 Version For explanation see page Order code and/or text Higher coolant temperatures or site altitude ) /7 KT... C (round off to 5 ) or alt.... m above sea level (round off to 500 m) specify desired power output Motor protection by PTC thermistor ) with 3 integral temperature sensors for warning with 3 integral temperature sensors for shutdown with 6 integral temperature sensors for warning and shutdown / A0 A A Abnormal cable entry / Rotation of terminal box by 80 K85 Terminal box on right side Terminal box on left side / K09 K0 Second normal shaft end 3 ) / K6 Radial sealing ring at drive end for /4 K7 flange types 4 ) (sizes 00 to 35) Reinforced bearing at drive end up to size 80 /4 K0 Anti-condensation heating /6 for 30 V for 5 V K45 K46 Fitted tacho-generator GMP.0 s-4, IM B5 / G37 Coating: /5 Normal coating in colors other than RAL 7030 Special coating in color RAL 7030 Special coating in color other than RAL 7030 Y53 K6 Y54 - and additional text: Normal coating RAL... - and additional text: Special coating RAL... Regreasing device /4 K40 Degree of protection IP 55 for motor /38 K49 Manual brake release /39 K8 Example Hoisting gear motor with disc brake LV9 Size 60 L (0 kw for S3-40 %) 66 Six-pole, 000 rpm 6 Normal version A Braking torque M B = 50 Nm B Operating voltage 3-phase 50 Hz, 380 V Type IM B 3 0 Marking for special version Z Code for manual brake release This order number uniquely specifies the version of the hoisting gear motor: LV9 66-6AB0 - Z K8 { K8 ) Additional cost will only be billed with a power reduction of > 5 %; for motors with abnormal winding, the extra cost is already taken into account ) See Catalog NS K for corresponding tripping unit 3 ) Withmotorsfromsize80Mofverticaltype,thetransferabletorquemustbecalculated(onrequest) 4 ) Not possible for type IM V 3 - /44 Siemens HE. 999

52 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Dimension drawings Certified dimensions With the types listed below, the specified dimensions are certified for all listed versions. All shaft ends have a locating thread to DIN 33 sheet, as follows: For motors Dimensions Version to DIN IM B 3 a, b, h, s, w,d,l,t,u 468 IM B 5 IM V b,e,i,s,d,l,t,u 4948 Shaft diameter up to 30 mm over 30 to 38 mm over 38 to 50 mm over 50 to 85 mm Thread M0 M M6 M0 Classes of fit Flange dimension b,shaft end dimension d as well as the keyway and featherkey dimensions t and u (in bold print) are as follows: Tolerances The following tolerances are met for dimensions a, b, c and h in bold print: Dimensions Version Class of fit to DIN b up to 30 mm j6 760 over 30 mm h6 760 d up to mm j6 760 over up to 50 mm k6 760 over 50 mm m6 760 t, u 6885, sheet Dimensions Tolerances mm a, b up to 50 mm ± 0.75 over 50 up to 500 mm ±.0 over 500 up to 700 mm ±.5 c up to 00 mm ± 0.5 over 00 up to 500 mm ± 0.5 over 500 mm ±.0 h up to 50 mm 0.5 over 50 mm.0 Siemens HE. 999 /45

53 ! Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Dimension drawings Type IM B 3 G I! 0 - # # = I # @ K K C " #? F ) J J I " M A = K! M! - O A > E= C = O F F I I % I > B J J For motor Dimension symbols according to Size Type DIN a b c e f g g h k k v p q s ) s 3 w w IEC B A HA BB AB AC H L LC HB HD K K C CA 00 L LV M0 xpg M LV9 3 LV M0 xpg M LV9 33 LV9 34 LV M0 xpg M LV M xpg L LV L LV M xpg L LV9 06 LV M6 xpg For motor Cylindrical shaft ends, drive end 3 ) Cylindrical shaft end, non-drive end Size Type DIN d l t u s 4 d l t u s 5 IEC D ) E ) GA ) F ) DA ) EA ) GA ) F ) 00 L LV M M8 M LV M M8 LV9 4 3 M LV9 33 LV9 34 LV M M 60 M LV M M 60 L LV L LV M M6 00 L LV9 06 LV M0 4/ /5.5 /4 M6 For motor Conical shaft ends, drive end 4 ) Conical shaft end, non-drive end 5 ) Size Type DIN d d d 4 l l t u s 6 d d 3 d 5 l l 3 t 3 u 3 s 7 IEC 80 L LV M30x M0 00 L LV9 06 LV M36x M ) Through-hole for bolt ) Symbol is only specified for cylindrical shaft ends 3 ) Conical shaft end for sizes 00 to 60 on request 4 ) Cylindrical shaft end for sizes 80 and 00 abnormal 5 ) On request Note: Pg = conduit thread /46 Siemens HE. 999

54 = Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Dimension drawings Type IM B 5 and IM V 6 O F A 8 M EJD? = F O G I! 0 - # $ = A B I " E? - O A > E= C = O F F I I $ I @ " C K K ) C C J K! J I B D A I : " # " #! 0 A F = JJA H J = " BH = " # J J For motor Size Type DIN a b c e f S z g g g i k k k ) q s 3 IEC P N LA M T S Z AC LE L LC LM K 00 L LV xpg3.5 M LV xpg3.5 LV9 4 3 M LV9 33 LV9 34 LV xpg6 60 M LV xpg9 60 L LV L LV xpg9 00 L LV9 06 LV xpg4 For motor Cylindrical shaft ends, drive end ) Cylindrical shaft end, non-drive end Size Type DIN d l t u s 4 d l t u s 5 IEC D 3 ) E 3 ) GA 3 ) F 3 ) DA 3 ) EA 3 ) GA 3 ) F 3 ) 00 L LV M M8 M LV M M8 LV9 4 3 M LV9 33 LV9 34 LV M M 60 M LV M M 60 L LV L LV M M6 00 L LV9 06 LV M0 4/ /5.5 /4 M6 For motor Conical shaft ends, drive end 4 ) Conical shaft end, non-drive end Size Type DIN d d d 4 l l t u s 6 d d 3 d 5 l l 3 t 3 u 3 s 7 IEC 80 L LV M30x M0 00 L LV9 06 LV M36x M )OntypeIMVwithcanopy ) Conical shaft end for sizes 00 to 60 on request 3 ) Symbol is only specified for cylindrical shaft ends 4 ) Cylindrical shaft end for sizes 80 and 00, abnormal Note: Pg = conduit thread Siemens HE. 999 /47

55 Machines Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake Spare parts Motor type LV9 Order No. Brush holder Carbon brushes Slipring assembly set = 3 per motor set = 6 per motor 07 LY7 70 LY8 80 LY LY7 7 LY8 8 LY LY7 7 LY8 8 LY LY7 73 LY8 83 LY LY7 74 LY8 84 LY LY7 75 LY8 85 LY9 95 Spring-operated brake (complete brake) Brake with 60 Nm Type Brake with 00 Nm Type Brake with 50 Nm Type /48 Siemens HE. 999

56 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Technical features and applications Applications Design With their fitted disc brake, the self-ventilated hoisting gear motors LD9/8 form a compact drive unit. The DCoperated spring-loaded double-disc brake is designed to be a holding brake; however, it can also carry out an emergency shutdown from full motor speed. In the event of a power failure, the brake is applied automatically by its spring force, bringing the drive to a standstill. TheLDmotorsareself-ventilated types. Depending on the size, brakes with different torques can be fitted to the motors (see product range or technical data). The brakes are DC-operated; they are connected to 30 V AC via a high-speed switching module fitted in the motor terminal box. The housing and terminal box are made of cast iron. Product range Theproductrangecovers sizes 3S to 5M over the power range 7.3 kw to 6.5 kw with S3-40 % CDF and braking torques of 00 Nm to 400 Nm. Further data and information on power, influence of temperature and installation height mechanical balance quality as for the LT motors. Motor No. of poles Size Type 4 6 Degree of protection IP 54 Regreasing device Insulating material class in the motor Temperature sensor Braking torque of the brake B M rated (Nm) Winding F Shutdown Warning Shaft end, drive 3 S LD M LD M LD L LD M LD L LD L LD S LD8 0 5 M LD8 3 Normal version At extra cost if specially ordered On request Electrical design Cylindrical DIN 748 Conical DIN 448 Operating voltage The hoisting gear brake motorsareavailablefromthe catalog for the following normal voltages: Motor Brake 3-phase 50 Hz 380 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 30 V 3-phase 50 Hz 400 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 30 V 3-phase 50 Hz 500 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 30 V 3-phase 50 Hz 660 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 30 V 3-phase 50 Hz 690 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 30 V 3-phase 60 Hz 460 V Single-phase 50/60 Hz 30 V PTC thermistor sensors Anti-condensation heating The normal versions of LD motors are supplied without thermistor sensors. On request, three or six thermistor sensors for warning and/or shutdown can be fitted (at extra cost). The connections for the thermistor sensors are in the terminal box of the motor. The motors can be provided with anti-condensation heating (at extra cost). There is an alternative at no extra cost: application of a voltage of about 4 to 0 % of the motor rated voltage to stator terminals U and V; 0 to 30 % of the motor rated current is sufficient for adequate heating. Insulation The motor windings have insulating material class F. Siemens HE. 999 /49

57 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Mechanical design Type The motors can be supplied intypesimb5orimvwith canopy. Type IM B3 on request. Housing The housing and terminal box of the motor are made of cast iron. Degree of protection Coating Add-on options The degree of protection of the motors in the normal versions is IP 54 with open condensate drain holes. IP 55 is possible at extra cost. Higher degrees of protection are available on request. The motors have a special coating (RAL 7030). Other colors are possible at extra cost. Encoders, such as incremental encoder HOG0 from Hübner, can be fitted to the brake motors at extra cost. The brake can also be provided with a microswitch at extra cost. Terminal box All connections for the motor and brake are in the terminal box. This is arranged at the top in the normal version. Cableentryisattheright when viewed from the drive end. Thefollowingtableshowsthe possible terminal box connections: Motor type LD9 30 LD9 33 LD9 63 LD9 66 LD9 83 LD9 86 LD9 07 LD8 0 LD8 3 Thread terminal bolt Stator Entry thread in DIN Stator Cable entry Additional equipment M5 PG 3 x PG 3.5 M6 PG 9 3 x PG 3.5 M8 PG 36 3 x PG 3.5 Shaft ends In their normal versions, the LD motors are manufactured with a cylindrical shaft end to DIN 748; a conical shaft end is available on request (at extra cost). Maximum permissible speed The maximum permissible speed is rpm and 800 rpm for motor LD8 3 with brake NFE 00/40. Bearings The nominal bearing life for motors of horizontal type is at least 40,000 hours for coupling operation without axial additional loads, when the motors are operated at 50 Hz. In operation on a converter, particularly in operation above the rated speed, the bearings are subjected to greater mechanical stress. This reduces the grease service life and bearing life (information available on request). Sizes 3 to 80 M are equipped with bearings which are greased for life. Upward of size 80 L the motors have open bearings. These must be regreased on time according to the grease service life, so that the nominal bearing life can be reached. A regreasing device at the motor drive end is possible from size 60 M at extra cost. Size Drive end bearing, horizontal type Non-drive-end bearing, horizontal type 3 S 608 RS C3 607 RS C3 3 M 6308 RS C RS C3 60 M 6309 RS C RS C3 60 L 630 RS C RS C3 80 M 630 RS C RS C3 80 L 630 C3 630 C3 00 L 63 C3 630 C3 5 S 633 C3 63 C3 5 M 633 C3 63 C3 /50 Siemens HE. 999

58 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Brake design Features and method of operation The electromagnetic springloaded double-disc brake NFE is purely a holding brake and must not be used as an operational brake, except for an emergency stop. This is a spring-loaded, electrically released doubledisc brake which is applied in the no-voltage state, and is released electromagnetically when the coil () is excited with a DC voltage. The brake flange (7) is designed as a reversible flange for a single readjustment. Operation of the brake is only permissible in conjunction with the high-speed switching module. When no current flows through the coil (), the compression springs (6) press the armature disc (4) axially against the friction lining holder with lining (5), causing the braking effect. In the releasing operation, energizing of the coil () causes the armature disc(4)tobepulledtothe bobbin () against the spring force. On account of the compact design with the closed bobbin housing and a suitable seal at theshaft,thebrakehasahigh degree of protection. With its closed condensate drain hole, the brake is the only unit to have degree of protection IP 65. When it is fitted to the motor with opened condensate drain holes, the degree of protection of the brake motor is IP 54. The brake has anticorrosion protection from a salt-laden maritime atmosphere. ) 0 - # % = ' & % " $ # Bobbin, H= E D A Coil = HH= C > A M 3 High-speed switching module 4 Armature disc 5 Lining holder with lining 6 Compression spring 7 Brake flange 8 Release bracket 9 Release rod!! " # $ % & 0 EC D I F A I M EJ? D E K A E J H JA H E = > N Emergency release The brake is equipped with a release bracket (8) as standard for mechanical emergency release in the event of a power failure. The release rod (9) is detachable. This is a non-self-holding emergency release of the type specified for hoisting gear, for example. As an option, the brake can also be equipped with a latching release rod (for a brake motor on travelling gear, for example). Microswitch The brake can be equipped with a microswitch to monitor the Brakeopened state(option); the contact is intended for 30 V AC. Siemens HE. 999 /5

59 ) ) ) ) Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Brake design High-speed switching module Thebrakecanonlybeoperated with the high-speed switching module. This is fitted in the motor terminal box. The supply voltage is 30 V AC. The rectifier in the high-speed switching module supplies the brake with 07 V DC when switched on. Fast releasing of the brake is thus achieved. After the releasing operation, an automatic changeover to a holding voltage of 03.5 V DC takes place. The brake coil is designed for this voltage at 00 % CDF. The application time of the brake depends on whether the brake coil is switched with DC or AC. The fastest application time is achieved with DC switching. If, on travelling gear for example, a longer application time is desired, this can be achieved by inserting a jumper in the high-speed! " # $ % & ' 0 - # & switching module (see following circuit diagram). ) + I M EJ? D E C, + I M EJ? D E C E? H I M EJ? D E? H I M EJ? D + A? JE B H > =? > K A D A = JE C F JE = > =? > K A 0 A = JE C F JE = > H M > H M! " # $ % & ' K F A H * H= A? E * H= A? E E? H I M EJ? D! 8 ) + 6 O F B? J=? J! 8 ) + > H M > =? H = O F A > H M > K A H = O? I + I M EJ? D 0 - # ' The connections are as in the adjacent diagram:! " # $ % & ' 0 EC D I F A I M EJ? D E K A 0 - #! + A? JE I > H = A I E@ A ' + E 0 A = JE C! " # E? H I M EJ? D > K A > H M > =? + A? JE I? K I J A H I E@ A! # 8 ) +, + I M EJ? D 0 A = JE C $ % & E? H I M EJ? D 0 - #! F HJ= J O BEJ JD A K F A H > A JM A A JA H E = I B H ) + I M EJ? D E C I A A EC! > =? > H M > K A H = O F A H = O? I Technical data of the high-speed switching module Design and technical data Switching time: approx. s of the high-speed switching Max. coil current.5 A module: Optional DC or AC For connection to 30 V + switching 5% 0% AC / 50 Hz. Varistor (integral coil Half-wave bridge rectifier = protection) 07/03.5 V/DC Interference suppression (RC networks) also as switching contact protection (mains protection) Overvoltage protection for DC switch Connection facility for microswitch (changeover contact) Anti-condensation heating for the brake (on request) /5 Siemens HE. 999

60 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Brake design Planning notes for brakes The following design variables should be considered for selecting the right brake: Braking torque Assuming that the deceleration is approximately the same as acceleration, the braking torque is: M Br M Ja x h. Where: M Br Braking torque of the mechanical brake M Ja Accelerating torque to accelerate the linearly moved and rotating masses Accordingly, the braking torque of the mechanical brake must approximately correspond to the maximum required motor torque. Braking energy for emergency shutdown The braking energy for occasional emergency shutdowns should be checked so that the brake is not thermally overloaded. The permissible values can be found in the table Operational values of the disc brake (page /54). The braking energy developed for running gear can be approximately calculated from the adjacent equation. In any case, the maximum values of speed of travel or rotation occurring in operation should be applied. It may also be necessary to take into account a speed increase caused by wind forces. W N = M BN + M M BN R M W m¼ η ¼ V ¼ 7. ¼ Z max rot max 3 J ¼ n ¼ 0 W N Braking energy in joules M BN RatedtorqueofthebrakeinNm M R Running resistance, referred to the motor shaft in Nm M W Wind resistance, referred to the motor shaft in Nm Z Number of brake motors m Linearly moved masses in t J rot Moment of inertia of all rotating parts per motor in kgm V max Speed upon brake application in m/min n max Motor speed of rotation upon brake application in rpm Braking energy and energy capacity For occasional emergency (For a single emergency shut- shutdowns, the brake must down, the permissible energy be capable of taking up the capacity Q E can be found in corresponding heat. The the table Operational values maximum permissible energy of the brake (page /54). capacity Q E can be found in the diagram, according to the number of switching operations. Siemens HE. 999 /53

61 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Brake design Technical data Operational values of the brake Type Braking torque Nm Supply voltage V/AC Holding power W Releas- Releasining power current W A Holding current A Braking energy Q E for emergency shutdown Ws Releasing time ms Closing time DC ms Closing Moment time AC of inertia of brake ms kgm² NFE NFE NFE 5/ NFE NFE NFE 00/ The switching times are mean values applying to a rated air gap and cold coil (0 C). /54 Siemens HE. 999

62 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Environmental conditions and special versions Climatic resistance The brake motors can be used under the following conditions: Climatic region Climatic group Climatic class Normal version AandT to DIN 5009 Moderate to IEC 7-- J, J, J3, F to Siemens standard SN 9070 With increased anti-corrosion protection HandM to DIN 5009 Worldwide to IEC 7-- A and F to Siemens standard SN 9070 The version with increased anti-corrosion protection can also be decontaminated. These data apply to the anticorrosion protection; additionally, the temperature limits generally applying to electrical machines should be observed. Siemens HE. 999 /55

63 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Selecting and ordering data Intermit- Operating values Operating speed 500 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 3000 rpm) tent duty S3 - Motor type LD Size 3 S 3 M 60 M 60 L Order No. supplement (9th + 0th place) AA AA AA AA 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm Max. torque M max Nm Rated current at 400 V A % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm Max. torque M max Nm Rated current at 400 V A % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm Max. torque M max Nm Rated current at 400 V A % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm Max. torque M max Nm Rated current at 400 V A Brake type NFE0 NFE0 NFE6 NFE5/30 Braking torque Nm Total moment of inertia kgm² Total weight kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +4 % /56 Siemens HE. 999

64 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Selecting and ordering data Intermittent duty Operating values Operating speed 500 rpm (max. permissible operating speed 3000 rpm ) Operating speed 500 rpm S3 - Motor type LD LD Size 80 M 80 L 00 L 00 L 5 S 5 M 5 M Order No. supplement (9th + 0th place) AA AA AA AB AA AA AB 5 % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm Max. torque M max Nm Rated current at 400 V A % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm Max. torque M max Nm Rated current at 400 V A % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm Max. torque M max Nm Rated current at 400 V A % Rated speed rpm Rated power kw Rated torque Mn Nm Max. torque M max Nm Rated current at 400 V A Brake type NFE5/30 NFE40 NFE40 NFE60 NFE60 NFE60 NFE00/40 Braking torque Nm Total moment of inertia kgm² Total weight kg For 3-phase 460 V, 60 Hz the following technical data are changed: Speed approx. +0 % Rated power approx. +4% ) Max. permissible operating speed 800 rpm for motor LD8 3-4AB Siemens HE. 999 /57

65 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Selecting and ordering data Legend for order numbers Place in the order number L D 4 Z L D 4 Z Size Number of poles Brake size Voltage and frequency 50Hz 380 V 400 V V V V 6 60Hz 460 V 8 Other voltage and/or frequency ) 9 Type IMB5 IMV(withcanopy) 4 IMB3 ) 0 IMB35 ) 6 Special version 3 ) Z ) Option: order code LY and text ) On request 3 ) Please specify the desired version with its order code or in plain text according to table overleaf /58 Siemens HE. 999

66 Machines Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Selecting and ordering data Additional ordering details Special version Order code Plain text Higher coolant temperature or site altitude Y50 ) Additional text: Specify KT ).. C (round off to 5 ) or AH )... m above sea level (round off to 500 m) and desired power output Special coating in a different color Y54 Additional text: Special coating to RAL.. Motor protection by PTC thermistors with 3 integral temperature sensors for warning with 3 integral temperature sensors for shutdown with 6 integral temperature sensors for warning and shutdown A0 A A Terminal box at top (on IM B5) Cable entry on the right (viewed from drive end) Cable entry on the left (viewed from drive end) Normal version K0 External grounding L3 Anti-condensation heating for 30 V, AC for 5 V, AC K45 K46 Abnormal shaft end (conical) Y55 Must be specified in plain text Regreasing device (at drive end only) on BG 60 M and higher K40 IP 55 K49 Microswitch K87 Fitted incremental encoder HOG0 K85 Latched emergency release K88 Example Hoisting gear motor LD8 45kW in S3-60 % 0 Four-pole, 500 rpm 4AA 3-phase 50 Hz, 400 V 4 Type IM B 5 Identification for special version Z Order code for anti-condensation heating for single-phase, 50/60 Hz, 30 V This order number uniquely specifies the version of the hoisting gear motor: LD8 0-4AA 4 - Z K45 { K45 ) This order code only specifies the version for pricing ) (KT = coolant temperature; AH = site altitude) Siemens HE. 999 /59

67 /60 Siemens HE. 999 K J? B 0 - #!!? = > G ) C! # C 0 * F N A " # H I " N ' A! & N " # I Dimension drawings Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake Machines For motor Dimension designations to DIN Size a b c d e f g k k ) I o p q r (I) s t u A BI x z Flange holes Size Type p Brake IEC P N LA D M T AC L LC E HD S GA F 3 S LD NFE 0 A Pg M LD NFE 0 A Pg M LD NFE 6 A Pg L LD NFE 5/30 A Pg M LD NFE 5/30 A Pg L LD NFE 40 A Pg L LD NFE 40 A Pg L LD NFE 60 A Pg S LD8 0-4 NFE 60 A Pg M LD8 3-4 NFE 60 A Pg M LD8 3-4 NFE 00/40 A Pg Center hole in shaft end up to 38 diam. M (DIN 33 - DS) with 4, 48 diam. M6 55 diam. and above M0 )Max.lengthwhenHOG0fitted

68 System components 3/ SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller 3/ Applications 3/ Technical features 3/3 Technical data 3/7 Planning notes 3/8 Selecting and ordering data 3/ Accessories 3/0 Spare parts 3/3 Dimension drawings 3/9 Resistor units 3/9 Summary 3/3 Wire-wound resistor units 3PP 3/39 Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 3/50 Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 3/60 ELDRO brake operators 3/60 Summary and applications 3/6 Technical description 3/66 Technical data 3/69 Selecting and ordering data 3/7 Dimension drawings 3/75 Sectional diagrams and parts list 3/88 Spare parts Siemens HE /

69 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller SIMOTRAS HE power controller for 55 A Applications SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controllers serve for the closed and open-loop control of three-phase hoisting gear motors with slipring rotors. The units are particularly suitable for crane modernization because the existing components, such as motors, resistors, cables, etc. can usually still be utilized. They can be employed for single motor or multimotor drives. Units for up to 65 C are available for high ambient temperatures. Technical features SIMOTRAS HE is a fully controlled, three-phase thyristor power controller in compact unit technology. The electronic phase-sequence changeover makes stator contactors superfluous. SIMOTRAS HE combines two methods of speed adjustment for slipring motors: Slope adjustment of the motor characteristic by variable rotor resistances Varying the motor voltage by means of phase-angle control (the supply frequency of the motor is not changed, it is always identical to the system frequency). The stator phase-angle control is characterized by infinitely variable, load-independent closed-loop control in fourquadrant operation. The control range is ±60 % of rated speed. The speed-related switching of the rotor contactors protects the mechanical components. Braking and reversing of the drive always takes place over the control range. With zero position switching, electrical braking takes place; the mechanical brake is only engaged at about 5 % of rated speed. The unit has various monitoring circuits, e.g.: Phase failure Setpoint/actual-value Unit overtemperature 3/ Siemens HE. 999

70 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Technical data Unit design The SIMOTRAS HE unit The power section, comprises: a basic board and the hoisting gear technology module. Block diagram of the SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller ) + # $ 0 K F J # 8! - ) + # $ 0 K F J # ) $ / ) " $ # " " * = I E? > = HEC C A H K EJ M A H I A? JE ! 9 + K HHA J? JH A H + I J= C A 5 F A JH A H ! 4 = F BK? JE C A A H= J H 0 EI JE C C A = H JA? D C K A = I JA H? JH A H + H= A? JH "! ) 0 - #! " = Siemens HE /3

71 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Technical data Power section Basic board The power section is a threephase thyristor controller in compact unit technology. Two additional thyristor modules in the shunt arm of the power section enable phasesequence reversal and, therefore, 4Q operation of the drive. Downstream current transformers in two phases form the current actual value for current control. This accommodates the trigger unit and pulse separator for the thyristors, the power supply for the control voltageandthesynchronizing voltage for the trigger unit. The pulse separator is driven by the command stage. Depending on load condition, the converter operates in motor mode (phase sequence for driving), st and 3rd quadrants) or in braking mode with braking by reversal (nd and 4th quadrants). Discarding of the conventional stator contactors allows fast torque reversal and, therefore, high dynamic control. Hoisting gear technology module This module assumes full Scope of functions closed-loop control and the entire crane control, right up to The incoming signals from operating the rotor contactors; the master controller, such important safety and monitor- as setpoint and control ing functions are integrated. enable, are accepted. Adaptation to the installation is The downstream ramp- thus considerably simplified. function generator, The board is situated at the settable in the four ramps, top in the SIMOTRAS HE unit forms the speed setpoint. and is easily accessible; this The speed controller with ensures simple and fast set- subordinate current conting of control parameters for trol loop follows the ramp- startup and optimization. function generator and forms the actual control loop. Additionally, a starting pulse is formed to initiate the hoisting direction of the motor for hoisting gear, immediately after switching on. This prevents load sagging. A controller is fitted for rotor stage sequencing; this selects the intended stages independently of speed and initiates return sequencing. All inputs, outputs, important messages and operating functions are indicated by LED. The integral standstill monitoring allows controlled, electrical braking of the drive. For cable changing, on hoisting gear for example, a jogging mode with creep speed is provided. Monitoring functions integrated in the unit Failure of a phase in the power section Wrong direction connection Brake engaging monitoring Speed setpoint/actualvalue monitoring Monitoring of the control voltage for the electronics in the power section Unit overtemperature Allsignalleadsareroutedto non-reversible connectors. Modes Variable-speed operation Over the control range from approx. ±3 % to ±60 % max. of rated speed. Presetting of the speed setpoint via master controller, analog value generator and ramp-function generator. Torque control Over the range ±60 % to ±00 % of rated speed. A speed resulting from the instantaneous load and effective rotor characteristic is developed. Presetting of the setpoint via a detent of the power controller (approx. 40 excursion) with continuous setpoint presetting, or position 4 on power controller with detent positions in conjunction with a setpoint module. 3/4 Siemens HE. 999

72 ) Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Technical data Characteristics The speed is infinitely variable over the control range by operating the power controller. Only the end of the control range is detected by the crane operator with a detent at the power controller. Furthermore, the characteristics, which are governed by the resistance stages, are followed in oversynchronous or subsynchronous operation according to the load in the output stage. Current control is always operational so that set maximum torques are not exceeded. The circuits are, of course, suitable for straight reversing (plugging). Control characteristics for stator phase-angle control for travelling gear with circuit "csak" * H = E C?? M EI A, H EL E C?? M EI A " & 5 6 $ 3 & " $ " " $ " & 5 6 $ & ", H EL E C? K JA H + 9 * H = E C? K JA H + 9 ///// Control range SIMOTRAS HE 0 - #! # = K Characteristics for braking by reversal RR Characteristics for controlled operation clockwise RL Characteristics for controlled operation conter-cw ST Characteristics for controlled operation * Application of the current limitation (e. g. I max = I N ) Siemens HE /5

73 ) Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Technical data Control characteristics for stator phase-angle control for hoisting gear with circuit "csk" K E A * H = E C D EI JE C 0 EI JE C, H EL E C D EI JE C 5 6 & $ " 4 0 " $ $ " & 4 5 " $ 5 6 & " $ 5 6 &, H EL E C M A H E C K * H = E C M A H E C E A M A H E C ///// Control range SIMOTRAS HE 0 - #! $ = K Characteristics for braking by reversal e. g. lowering delayed with overhauling load or hoisting delayed if active counter cw operation is required. RH Characteristics for controlled operation lift RS Characteristics for controlled operation lowering ST Characteristics for controlled operation * Application of the current limitation (e. g. I max = I N ) 3/6 Siemens HE. 999

74 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Technical data Loading values as a function of coolant temperature and site altitude Ambient Change in loading values or coolant Temperature Standard version Special version ) Natural air cooling Forced-air cooling Natural air cooling Forced-air cooling +35 C 0% 0% 0% 0% E C & $ ) 0 - #! % +40 C 0% 6% 0% 0% +45 C 0% % 0% 0% +50 C 6% 0% % " +55 C % 8% +60 C 8% 4% +65 C 30% 30%! " # 5 EJA = A 3 Planning notes In hoisting mode, the motors are not operated in continuous duty but with a variable load, at different speeds and with different operating times. Under these conditions, it is sufficient if the unit rated current I N is greater than the motor rated current. In intermittent duty with suitable intervals, the units can draw twice the unit rated current I N for 0 s. All the acceleration situations normally occurring with hoisting gear are thus covered. To ensure safe ramp-up of the control characteristic to rated speed, the use of four rotor contactors is recommended (and essential in the event of possible emergency operation). The rotor contactors are controlled via auxiliary contactors. The rotor resistance should be at least.6 k ),even with a view to operation with partial loads. As an estimate for the resistor unit, one resistor size 8 (3PR380 or 3PS380) can be taken as a basis per 0 kw motor power. For special operating conditions such as running for a long time under full load at very slow speeds, motors, resistances and SIMOTRAS HE must be selected accordingly. In operation with phaseangle control, there is a higher flow of stator current to develop the required torque, on account of the reduced magnetization. The motors can therefore be thermally overloaded because the I Rlossrises with the square of the current. The resistors burn out if the motors are operated on the control characteristic for a long time. The current specifications in the list therefore only relate to a cycle duration of 0 sec.; that is, in S3-40 % the permissible cyclic duration factor is 48 s. Although the SIMOTRAS HE units can be operated continuously at the unit rated current I N, the temperature limit of the thyristors will be reached. Acceleration from this operating state is not permissible. The thyristors could be overloaded. In general, a control range of ±60 % with a control characteristic of 0.4 k ) is taken as a basis. With a control range of only ±40 % and a control characteristic of 0.6 k ),temperature rise of the motor when running under rated load and at 0 % rated speed is only 30 % compared to 00 % with a control range of ±60 %. If operation takes place for a long time under rated load at slow speed, the thermal stress on the motor can be reduced with the 0.6 k ) control characteristic. On account of the discarding of stator contactors, the motor can no longer be isolated from the threephase power controller, for example when approaching an operational limit switch. If the controller cannot block the thyristors on account of a unit fault, an unacceptable operating state can occur. It is therefore advisable to use emergency or safety limit switches. These respond when the operational limit switches are run over and act on a supply contactor or the crane switch. ) These reductions are already taken into account in the selecting tables for H78/H79. ) k = Characteristic rotor resistance Siemens HE /7

75 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Selecting and ordering data Summary Basic version: KT up to 35 C or 45 C Special version KT up to 65 C (order code H78/H79) SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller, basic version Unit series Order No. 6GA4 65- Size CA75 CA CA5 CA CA30 CA37 CA45 Supply voltage Powersection 3/PE~50/60Hz0V0%to500V+0% Control electronics /N ~ 50/60 Hz 0 V 0 % to 50 V +0 % Rated current I N A Overload capability ) For 0 seconds x I N with unit at operating temperature Specified minimum load ) Motor current A Motor power output (at 400 V) kw Power loss at I N W Semiconductor fuses A Siemens SITOR at 660 V 3NE8 07 3NE8 00 3NE8 0 3NC8 43 3NC8 45 3NC8 47 3NC8 43 Mass, weight kg Height mm Width mm Depth mm Dimension drawing Page 3/3 Page 3/3 Page 3/3 Page 3/4 Page 3/4 Page 3/4 Page 3/4 Arrangement of control electronics Control and power section integrated in the unit Coil voltage of relays on the 30 V AC technology module Method of cooling to DIN 4 75 Natural air cooling Fan on internal power supply Current consumption Ambient temperature C 0 to to +35 Temperature for storage C 40 to +70 Degree of protection IP 00 ) If the unit is run constantly at I N, the temperature limit will be reached. Acceleration from this operating state is not permissible. ) With a motor at rated speed, especially with no load, there is otherwise a risk of intermittent current. The thyristors turn off on account of the low current. This can cause hunting of the drive. 3 ) Provide LV HRC fuses 3/8 Siemens HE. 999

76 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller CA55 CA75 CA88 3CA 3CA6 3CA5 3CA40 3/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 0 V 0 % to 500 V +0 % /N ~ 50/60 Hz 0 V 0 % to 50 V +0 % For0secondsxI N with unit at operating temperature ) 3) 3) 3) 3) 3NC8 43 3NC Page 3/4 Page 3/4 Page 3/5 Page 3/5 Page 3/5 Page 3/6 Control and power section integrated in the unit 30 V AC Fan on internal Fan 30 V AC power supply 0.94 A 0.94 A 0.94 A 0.65 A.34 A 0to+35 40to+70 IP 00 Siemens HE /9

77 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Selecting and ordering data SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller, special version H78 Unit series Order No. 6GA4 H78 Size CA75 CA CA5 CA ) CA30 ) CA37 ) CA45 ) Supply voltage Powersection 3/PE~50/60Hz0V0%to500V+0% Control electronics DC 4 V 5 % +5 % Rated current I N A Overload capability ) For0secondsxI N with unit at operating temperature Specified minimum load 3) Motor current A Motor power output (at 400 V) kw Power loss at I N W Semiconductor fuses A Siemens SITOR at 660 V 3NE8 07 3NE8 00 3NE8 0 3NC8 43 3NC8 45 3NC8 47 3NC8 43 Mass, weight kg Height mm Width mm Depth mm Dimension drawing Page 3/3 Page 3/3 Page 3/3 Page 3/4 Page 3/4 Page 3/4 Page 3/4 Arrangement of control electronics Control and power section integrated in the unit Coil voltage of relays on the 4 V DC (5 ma max. per relay) technology module Method of cooling to DIN 4 75 Current consumption Natural air cooling Fan 4 V DC 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.4 A Ambient temperature C 0 to +65 Temperature for storage C 40 to +70 Degree of protection IP 00 ) Units also available for fan voltage 30 V AC, order code H79 instead of H78. ) If the unit is run constantly at I N, the temperature limit will be reached. Acceleration from this operating state is not permissible. 3 ) With a motor at rated speed, especially with no load, there is otherwise a risk of intermittent current. The thyristors turn off on account of the low current. This can cause hunting of the drive. 4 ) Provide LV HRC fuses Caution: The overtemperature protection is designed for 65 C. At 35 C ambient temperature, the units must not be operated at the full rated current on pages 3/7 and 3/8. 3/0 Siemens HE. 999

78 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller CA55 ) CA75 ) CA88 3CA 3CA6 3CA5 3CA40 3/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 0 V 0 % to 500 V +0 % DC 4 V 5 % +5 % For0secondsxI N with unit at operating temperature ) 4) 4) 4) 4) 3NC8 43 3NC Page 3/3 Page 3/3 Page 3/5 Page 3/5 Page 3/5 Page 3/6 Control and power section integrated in the unit 4 V DC (5 ma max. per relay) 3 Fan 4 V DC Fan 30 V AC 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.94 A 0.94 A 0.94 A 0.65 A.34 A 0to+65 40to+70 IP 00 Siemens HE /

79 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Accessories Speed pulse generators Both analog tacho-generators and incremental encoders in conjunction with a tachomodule can be used for speed measurement. With an analog generator, the input voltage is 50 V max. Two-track pulse generator 6GA4 65-6AC The two-track pulse genera- usually visible at the non-drive tor 6GA465-6AC is particu- end of the motor. The bolt larly suitable for retrofitting of a supports the pulse generator generator to an existing motor. as an "extended shaft end" A connecting bolt is screwed and is supplied with the into the motor shaft, which is generator. These incremental encoders operate on the principle of photoelectric sensing of a grating disc. The pulse frequency generated is proportional to the speed. Speed measurement in both directions is possible on account of the two-track design. Pulses per revolution x00 Maximum speed 6000rpm Shaft loading, axial 5 N Shaft loading, radial 50 N Degree of protection to DIN IP 54 Vibration 0 g ( Hz) Shock 400 g at 6 ms axial / radial Housing Plastic Bearing Ball bearing Shaft Burnished steel Weight, mass 40 g Supply voltage x5vdc Current consumption 5 ma Cable length at generator.5 m Permissible cable length < 00 m Shielded cable Yes High-grade control cable e.g. Siemens 5 DE6/0.75/mm NYSLYCYÖ-J To prevent circulating currents, the shield is not connected in the generator Ambient temperature 0 C to + 60 C 3/ Siemens HE. 999

80 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Accessories Tacho-module 6GA4 65-6AB Since the SIMOTRAS HE unit has only one input for an analog speed actual value, a tacho-module 6GA465-6AB is needed to adapt the digital actual value. This module feeds the pulse generator with the supply voltage - this is 5 V for generator 6GA465-6AC - and uses a logic circuit to evaluate the direction of rotation on the basis of the pulse trains. A matched frequency/ voltage converter converts the pulse frequency to an analog voltage. ±0 V is produced at rated speed. Rated supply voltage / N ~ 50 / 60 Hz 30 V and tolerance 07-53V 0 % +0 % Rated input current ma 0 Typical power loss W Humidity class F to DIN Degree of protection IP 0 to DIN 0470 / EN 6059 / IEC 59 Creepage distances and clearances in Pollution severity to DIN VDE 00, Part housing Ambient temperature C 0to+45 Temperature for storage C 40to+70 Mass, weight kg 0.3 Heightxwidthxdepth mm 75 x 45 x 0 Cooling Natural air cooling Site altitude 000 m above sea level Pulses per revolution 00 with standard pulse generator, otherwise 0 to 500 (number of divisions) Output signal ±0Vor±0mA,±5%,short-circuitprotected Selection of output signals with slide switch -S ) Voltage source Current interface At the plant Switch setting (down): ±0V ± 00 % actual value Optional Switch setting (up): ±0mA ±00% actual value Visual indications in unit cover LED "MB" green = ready indication LED "MD" red = speed greater than zero (> 5 %) Matching of actual value smoothing to pulse frequency of generator with slide switch +S ) At the plant Switch setting (down): 0 ms Optional Switch setting (up): 30 ms Matching of pulse generator frequency to motor no. of poles with resistor Resistor -R on solder tags: 00kOhmfittedatplant R ) See Instruction Manual for other values Drehstromsteller SIMOTRAS HE Drehstromsteller SIMOTRAS HE 3 ) The components are easily accessible under the removable front cover. Siemens HE /3

81 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Accessories Tacho-module 6GA4 65-6AB Circuit diagram: tacho-module 6GA4 65-6AB and two-track pulse generator 6GA4 65-6AC + JH L J= C A ) + # $ 0! 8 ) I M ) +! 8 $ / ) " $ # $ ) * ) = C I F A =? JK = L = K A ) +, + 8, HEL A H ) ) JH A H C * 5! I )? JK = L = K A I JD E C HJ, 6 C 5, EC EJ= I F A =? JK = L = K A! A H ) * > H C H C C A M I I M BHA A " 6 M JH=? F K I A C A A H= J H F K? A $ / ) " $ # $ ) + ) 0 - #! & = > H > H M C H C HA O C C HA A C A O A M M I M D EJA I M > =? 7 * BHA A JH=? ) JH=? * I D 3/4 Siemens HE. 999

82 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Accessories Tacho-module 6GA4 65-6AB Circuit diagram: tacho-module 6GA4 65-6AB and pulse generator with external 4 V DC supply + JH L J= C A ) + # $ 0! 8 - ) I M ) +! 8 $ / ) " $ # $ ) * ) = C I F A =? JK = L = K A 6 6 ) +, + 8, HEL A H ) ) JH A H 3 C * 5! I )? JK = L = K A I JD E C HJ, 6 C 5, EC EJ= I F A =? JK = L = K A! A H ) * BHA A F HJ= J, J? A? J I D = J C A A H= J H " ) O JM JH=? F K I A C A A H= J H F A? A? J H # 8 ) 0 - #! ' = - N JA H =, + L J= C A, + " 8 Siemens HE /5

83 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Accessories Setpoint modules 6GA4 65-6AA.. Thesetpointispresetcontinuously or in steps. Continuous setpoint presetting The setpoint can be preset continuously via a wire-wound potentiometer fitted to the master controller or via an encoder OEC- (see Section Duplex master controller 3SJ3 on page 4/ ff.). The master controller has a stepless control range. The transition from the control range to the high speed is marked by a detent. The SIMOTRAS HE unit has a setpoint input for ±0 V and ±0 ma. The changeover is made on the technology module. Setpoint presetting in steps with setpoint module 6GA4 65-6AA.. Presetting of the setpoint in steps is particularly suitable for retrofitting SIMOTRAS HE units to existing crane systems, because these mainly utilize 4-stage power controllers. Setpoint module 6GA465-6AA.. serves for presetting an analog speed setpoint in steps by a 4-stage master controller. Four independently selectable output voltages can thus be selected via floating relay contacts. The maximum output level is ±0 V and ±0 ma. The polarity of the output voltage or output current and, therefore, the direction of rotation is preset via the smallest setpoint. The adjacent Fig. shows the four-step selection by means of potentiometers P to P4. "! K JF K J I EC = = = C I F A I A JF E J E B K H I JA F I! " & # 5 A H= JA = I J ! SL Setpoint for 0-0 % counter-cw SR Setpoint for 0-0 % clockwise S Setpoint for 0-50 % S3 Setpoint for % S4 Setpoint for % 5 " " % K F K J I EC = I ) 0 - # " =? JH? I BH = I JA H? JH A H =? JEL = JE B I A JF E J I JA F I There are three versions of this setpoint module: 6GA465-6AA00: Control voltage /N 50/60 Hz 30 V Coil voltage, relay AC 30 V 6GA465-6AA05: Control voltage /N 50/60 Hz 30 V Coil voltage, relay DC4V 65 C version 6GA465-6AA5: Control voltage /N 50/60 Hz 5 V Coil voltage, relay DC4V 65 C version 3/6 Siemens HE. 999

84 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Accessories Setpoint modules 6GA4 65-6AA.. Technical data Order No. 6GA4 65-6AA00 6GA4 65-6AA05 6GA4 65-6AA5 Rated supply voltage and /N-50/60Hz30V /N-50/60Hz30V / N - 50 / 60 Hz 5 V tolerance V 0 % +0 % % + 0 % 04-7 V 0% + 0 % Rated input current ma 0 Typical power loss W Humidity class F to DIN Degree of protection IP 0 to DIN 0470 / EN 6059 / IEC 59 Creepage distances and clearances in housing Pollution severity to DIN VDE 00, Part Ambient temperature C 0to+45 0to+65 0to+65 Temperature for storage C 40 to +70 Mass, weight kg 0.4 Heightxwidthxdepth mm 75 x 45 x 0 Cooling Natural air cooling Site altitude 000 m above sea level Output signal Voltage source Short-circuit protected, factory setting: ± 0 V ± 00 % setpoint Current interface Optionally: ± 0 ma ± 00 % setpoint Settings at the unit: Four setpoint steps via potentiometer via potentiometer P = slow P = moderate P3 = fast P4 = full Coil voltage of internal relays 30VAC 4VDC 4VDC Coil current of internal relays ma 0 max. 5 max. 5 max. Visual indications LED "ML" green = counterclockwise setpoint indication LED "MR" red = clockwise setpoint indication Potentiometer settings Extreme left Extreme right Accuracy % P 0% 0% P 0 % 50 % P3 40 % 80 % P4 70 % 00 % 3 Siemens HE /7

85 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Accessories Setpoint modules 6GA4 65-6AA.. Circuit diagram with setpoint module 6GA4 65-6AA00 + JH L J= C A ) + # $ 0! 8 ) I M - ) +! 8 $ / ) " $ # $ ) ) ) + ), ) JH A H "! ) = C I F A I A JF E J 4 C 6 ) = C I F A =? JK = L = K A! ) +! 8 5 " 5! F K J I EC = I + E L J= C A B HA = O I ) +! 8 H A N = F A? JH? I BH " I J= C A = I JA H? JH A H H A O F ) 0 - # " 3/8 Siemens HE. 999

86 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Accessories SIMOTRAS HE tester 6GA4 65-6AD Tester 6GA465-6AD is available for startup and diagnostics. The measured signals the SIMOTRAS HE unit via ribbon cable to test jacks on the tester. are fed from connector X3 on PIN Designation Meaning Scaling Theoutputsignalsareshortcircuit M, 0 V ground Reference potential, ground 0 V protected with respect to ground. External voltages ± n (actual) Speed actual value after scaling = tacho voltage ± 0 V must not be applied to the 3 ± n(set)** Speedsetpointatinput=pot.setting ± 0 V output signals. A high-impedance measuring instrument 4 ± n(set)** Speed setpoint after setpoint injection ahead of ramp-function ± 6V(± 0 V) (0 V DC range) is recommended 5 ± n(set)* generator Speed setpoint after ramp-function generator ahead of speed ± 6V(± 0 V) for voltage measurement controller 6 ± i(set) Speedcontrolleroutput=currentsetpoint ± 0 V 7 ± i (actual) Current actual value after scaling (absolute amount) i N =+5V 8 - i (set) Current setpoint (absolute amount) 0 to -0 V 9 u (set) = US Current controller output = setpoint for trigger unit 0 to V 0 R/L Command stage output = torque direction ± V 3 Siemens HE /9

87 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Spare parts Spare parts for the standard version Item Spare parts Quantity Installed in SIMOTRAS HE Order No. Thyristor modules 5 6GA4 65-CA75 6GA4 65-CA 6GA4 65-CA5 6GA4 65-CA 6GA4 65-CA30 6GA4 65-CA37 6GA4 65-CA45 6GA4 65-CA55 6GA4 65-CA75 SKKT 6/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E. Thyristor stack with power supply unit and control module 6GA4 65-CA88 6GA4 65-3CA 6GA4 65-3CA6 6GA4 65-3CA5 6GA4 65-3CA40 6SG6 47-AA56 6SG6 47-AA57 6SG6 47-AA58 6SG6 47-AA59 6SG6 47-AA60. Compactunitwithpowersupplyunitandcontrol module 6GA4 65-CA75 6GA4 65-CA 6GA4 65-CA5 6GA4 65-CA 6GA4 65-CA30 6GA4 65-CA37 6GA4 65-CA45 6GA4 65-CA55 6GA4 65-CA75 6SG6 47-AA65 6SG6 47-AA66 6SG6 47-AA67 6SG6 47-AA68 6SG6 47-AA69 6SG6 47-AA70 6SG6 47-AA7 6SG6 47-AA7 6SG6 47-AA73 Power supply unit and control module 6GA4 65-CA75 to -CA30 6GA4 65-CA37 to -CA75 6GA4 65-CA88 to -3CA6 6GA4 65-3CA5 6GA4 65-3CA40 6SG6 47-AA55 6SG6 47-AA54 6SG6 47-AA74 6SG6 47-AA75 6SG6 47-AA76 3 Technology module 6GA4 65-CA75 to -3CA40 6SG6 48-AA3 4 Fan 6GA4 65-CA to -CA75 6GA4 65-CA88 to -3CA6 6GA4 65-3CA5 6GA4 65-3CA40 6SG6 37-AA08 6SG6 37-AA 6SG6 37-AA 6SG6 37-AA3 5 Fuse -F -F3 6GA4 65-CA75 to -3CA x 3 mm, A slow 5x0mm,Amedium 3/0 Siemens HE. 999

88 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Spare parts Spare parts for the special version Z-H78 Item Spare parts Quantity Installed in SIMOTRAS HE Order No. Thyristor modules 5 6GA4 65-CA75-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA5-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA30-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA37-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA45-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA55-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA75-Z-H78 SKKT 6/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E. Thyristor stack with power supply unit and control module 6GA4 65-CA88-Z-H78 6GA4 65-3CA-Z-H78 6GA4 65-3CA6-Z-H78 6GA4 65-3CA5-Z-H78 6GA4 65-3CA40-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA56-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA57-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA58-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA59-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA60-Z-H78. Compactunitwithpowersupplyunitandcontrol module 6GA4 65-CA75-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA5-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA30-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA37-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA45-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA55-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA75-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA65-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA66-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA67-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA68-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA69-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA70-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA7-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA7-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA73-Z-H78 Power supply unit and control module 6GA4 65-CA75 to -CA30-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA37 to -CA75-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA88 to -3CA6-Z-H78 6GA4 65-3CA5-Z-H78 6GA4 65-3CA40-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA55-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA54-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA74-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA75-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA76-Z-H78 3 Technology module 6GA4 65-CA75 to -3CA40-Z-H78 6SG6 48-AA3-Z-H78 4 Fan 6GA4 65-CA to -CA75-Z-H78 6GA4 65-CA88 to -3CA6-Z-H78 6GA4 65-3CA5-Z-H78 6GA4 65-3CA40-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA6 6SG6 47-AA6 6SG6 47-AA63 6SG6 47-AA64 5 Fuse -F -F3 6GA4 65-CA75 to -3CA40-Z-H x 3 mm, A slow 5x0mm,Amedium 3 Siemens HE /

89 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Spare parts Spare parts for the special version Z-H79 Item Spare parts Anzahl Installed in SIMOTRAS HE Order No. Thyristor modules 5 6GA4 65-CA-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA30-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA37-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA45-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA55-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA75-Z-H79 SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 9/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E SKKT 50/6 E.. Compactunitwithpowersupplyunitandcontrol module 6GA4 65-CA-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA30-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA37-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA45-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA55-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA75-Z-H79 6SG6 47-AA68-Z-H79 6SG6 47-AA69-Z-H79 6SG6 47-AA70-Z-H79 6SG6 47-AA7-Z-H79 6SG6 47-AA7-Z-H79 6SG6 47-AA73-Z-H79 Power supply unit and control module 6GA4 65-CA to -CA30-Z-H79 6GA4 65-CA37 to -CA75-Z-H79 6SG6 47-AA55-Z-H78 6SG6 47-AA54-Z-H78 3 Technology module 6GA4 65-CA to -CA75-Z-H79 6SG6 48-AA3-Z-H78 4 Fan 6GA4 65-CA to -CA75-Z-H79 6SG6 37-AA45 5 Fuse -F -F3 6GA4 65-CA to -CA75-Z-H x 3 mm, A slow 5x0mm,Amedium 3/ Siemens HE. 999

90 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Dimension drawings SIMOTRAS HE without fan, 7-60 A (0-4 A with H78) ) ) 5 0 -! " % # " M A H I K F F O K A 6 A? D C K A 6 H= I F = HA J D K I E C? L A H # " = K JE C I? HA M I " N $ ) $ # " $ # )! % # % # ) % Siemens HE /3

91 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Dimension drawings SIMOTRAS HE with fan, 78-5 A (55-50 A with H78)! " % # " ' # $ # 0 - # "! = " $ #! % # % # ) & # = ) ) K JE C I? HA M I " N $ M A H I K F F O K A 6 A? D C K A 6 H= I F = HA J D K I E C? L A H ) ) % 3/4 Siemens HE. 999

92 ) Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Dimension drawings SIMOTRAS HE with flat-pack thyristors, A ( A with H78) = % " 6 H= I F = HA J? L A H 5 E@ A F = JA 5 K HC A I K F F HA I I H "! $ # 3 * +! ! 9 " 9! " # #! #! ) ' # # 0 - # " " = ) K JE C I? HA M I $ N & # #!! $ #!! % & $ # # Siemens HE /5

93 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Dimension drawings SIMOTRAS HE with flat-pack thyristors, 750 A (50 A with H78) 6 H= I F = HA J? L A H =!! &? = JE B I K HC A I K F F HA I I H 6 A? D C K A M A H I K F F O K A 5 E@ A F = JA $ & ' & #! ! 9! 9 " % " # #! # "! % $ ) 0 - # " # = ) ) K JE C I? HA M I & N " ' " " " ' % ' &!! # 3/6 Siemens HE. 999

94 Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Dimension drawings Pulse generator 6GA4 65-6AC 3 Three connection bolts with different threads (M5, M6, M8) are supplied. Siemens HE /7

95 ) ) Systemcomponents SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller Dimension drawings Tacho-module 6GA4 65-6AB 6 I *, % # 4 A L = > A BH J? L A H 6 =? K A ) * " # 0 - # " % = Setpoint module 6GA4 65-6AA 5 I 4 % # 4 A L = > A BH J? L A H 5 A JF E K A! " ! 5 " " # 0 - # " & = Minimum clearance from adjacent equipment at the sides (cable ducts, contactors, etc.) is 0 mm. For convection cooling to be unimpeded, a clearance of at least 0 mm must be provided above and below the unit (this also applies to the tacho-module). 3/8 Siemens HE. 999

96 Systemcomponents Resistor units Summary 3 Wire-wound resistor unit 3PP, degree of protection IP 3 Cast-iron resistor unit 3PR3, degree of protection IP 00 Steel grid resistor unit 3PS3, degree of protection IP 0 Resistor units are used in hoisting gear drives for threephase slipring motors as switchable series resistors, fixed slip resistors. Certain properties must be observed for their operation and loading:. Cast-iron resistors have a greater thermal capacity than steel grid resistors; they are better at coping with unpredictable, unusual thermal loads. In contrast, wire-wound and steel grid resistor units are less sensitive to vibration and severe shaking. The loading is governed by the current and cyclic duration factor (CDF) which specifies the ratio of loading duration to cycle duration. The CDF of the resistor unit is usually less than that of the motor because, in operation with the resistor short-circuited, only the motor is switched on. The rated current of the resistor unit is the current corresponding to the power drawn by the motor. If, as a result of frequent acceleration of great masses the power drawn by the motor contributes to the steady-state power, the rated current of the resistor unit should be chosen in accordance with this higher power. Slip stages should always be used for running gear and rotating gear if the drives are designed for high speeds, and great masses must be accelerated. It should be noted that fixed slip resistors cause a corresponding reduction in speed and, therefore, in motor power under full load. Siemens HE /9

97 Systemcomponents Resistor units Summary Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Rated voltage 500 V AC, 600 V DC 500 V AC, 800 V DC 000 V AC, 00 V DC Load current Up to 50 A From 5 A From 0 A Continuous power per resistor element Upto85W Upto350W Upto675W Heat storage capacity 8to8kJ 30to00kJ 30to90kJ Number of box sizes Features Small dimensions High heat storage capacity Good heat storage capacity For low to medium-power For medium and high-power For medium and high-power motors motors motors Resistor grid made of high-grade steel: Pick-off clamps for stepless Insensitive to short-term corrosion-resistant, unbreakable and non- fine adjustment overloads (surge loads) scaling even at high temperatures Good stepping facility with Insensitive to operational vibration and pick-offs shake Good stepping facility with pick-offs Design Degree of protection Resistor units with normal stacking The resistor units with normal stacking have suitable terminals which can be changed during startup. Resistor units with special stacking If the resistor unit is to be designed for optimum volume, a resistor unit with special stacking can be used. In this case, exact specifications of the resistor assembly and the terminals of the rotor contactors are required. Wire-wound resistor units 3PP are available in degrees of protection IP 00, IP 0 (normal version) and IP 3. Castiron and steel grid resistor units 3PR3 and 3PS3 are manufactured in degree of protection IP 00 as standard. If a higher degree of protection is desired (up to IP 3), kits 3PX6 must additionally be ordered (please see the relevant Selecting and ordering data ). General The design ratings of resistor units are governed by the starting frequency per hour and the relationship between starting plus actuating time and the no-current interval, i.e. the cyclic duration factor (CDF). For resistor units with fixed slip stage, this has the same CDF as the motor. The starting stages have shorter CDFs in accordance with their operating time. It should be noted, however, that according to the standard the cycle duration of resistor unitsisbasedontwomin., and for the motor 0 min.. This means that if the cycle duration of the motor is fully exploited, the slip stage of the resistor unit may become too warm; the slip stage must therefore be designed for a higher CDF. With hoisting gear, the cycle duration is considerably less than 0 min. on account of the short travel. Data for cycle duration and CDFaregivenintheselecting tables for each type of unit. Thepermissibleloadisspecified on the rating plate. These values must not be exceeded. On account of the unique nature of the various hoisting gear circuits and their characteristics, the loading of individual resistor stages may be a fraction or a multiple of the rated current of the motor and of the desired CDF. Control characteristics An extract of the control characteristics for the most common three-phase circuits is shownonthenexttwopages. The starting characteristics drawnwithdashedlinesinthe characteristics sheets are automatic intermediate settings and apply to motor power outputs of more than 63 kw. Motors with higher power output have a lower rated slip than smaller motors, and these intermediate settings were inserted to prevent the changeover peaks from becoming excessive during changeover to the final rotor stage. The characteristics drawn with dashed lines and marked B are intended for circuits with electrical braking by reversal at the zero setting. The terminals are always in the unit even if the circuit is not implemented with electrical braking by reversal. 3/30 Siemens HE. 999

98 Systemcomponents Resistor units Summary Control characteristics Control characteristics of the most common counter-torque control circuits 3 Control characteristics for counter-torque travelling control circuit "ak" Control characteristics for counter-torque hoisting control circuit "ehk(o)" Control characteristics for counter-torque hoisting control circuit "ek(0)" Siemens HE /3

99 Systemcomponents Resistor units Summary Control characteristics Control characteristics of the most common counter-torque control circuits IIIIII Control range R Control characteristics S High speed travel K Control characteristics for reversal * Application of the current limitation if this is set to.8 x I N. IIIIII Control range RH Control characteristics for lifting S High speed travel RS Control characteristics for lowering + contours K Control characteristics for reversal * Application of the current limitation if this is set to x I N. Control characteristics for stator phase-angle control with control range for circuit csak Control characteristics for stator phase-angle control with control range for circuit csk Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Description Product range and application Regulations Climatic resistance Resistor units for drives with motor output ratings of up to about 5 kw in S3-40 %. Five box sizes, which are governed by the number of integral resistor elements, are available. For price reasons, a distinction is made between partial and full installation with the larger boxes. A resistor unit for a motor can consist of several boxes. The resistor units comply with the "Regulations for low-voltage switchgear", DIN VDE Conformity of the units with the safety regulations of the EU guideline for low-voltage apparatus of February 9, 973 is thus simultaneously declared. Wire-wound resistor units 3PP can be used under the following climatic conditions: Climatic regions A, F, H, M and T to DIN 50 09, Part "General" climatic group to IEC 7-- Climatic classes J3, A and F to Siemens standard SN 9 070, Part 3/3 Siemens HE. 999

100 Systemcomponents Resistor units Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Description Design The wire-wound resistor units always have a fixed resistance stagefor8to0%slip. The resistor elements used are porcelain cylinders with resistance wire 3PY6 00. Glazed resistor elements 3PY are employed only in special cases, such as a high resistance value and very low current. All connections within the unit (except for resistor elements 3PY with screw terminals, are hard soldered. The elements are pushed onto sheet metal supports which are secured on a frame. Elements 3PY are retained by a clamp fitted to the sheet metal support. The frame is mounted on a sheet steel baseplate. The cover for degrees of protection IP 0 andip3isalsomadeof sheet steel. The design ratings and stages oftheresistorsarealways implemented according to the rotor data and motor loading to be specified with the order. The connections for the resistor stages are routed to the terminal strips at the bottom of the units through rubber grommets. Adjusting clamps can be fitted in special cases. Only the easily accessible resistor elements can be provided with adjusting clamps (permissible load up to 5 A). When an adjusting clamp is used, the resistance of an element decreases by about 8 %. Elements with resistance wiresoflessthan0.4mm diameter should not be given adjusting clamps, on account of the risk of wire breakage. 3 Mounting and maintenance Theunitsareintendedforwall mounting and the resistor elements must be vertical. Different mounting is not possible on account of the ventilation. The mounting position must be chosen so that cooling air can enter and exit unimpeded. When loaded to the values specified on the rating plate, the temperature rise of the outlet air does not exceed 00 K. If the air flow is impeded, temperature rise for all components can quickly reach excessive values. If a resistor unit comprises two or more boxes, they are always supplied individually. The assembling and electrical connections of the individual boxes must be carried out on site. During operation in a dustladen atmosphere, the units must occasionally be blown out with dry compressed air. Technical data Creepage distances and clearances to DIN VDE 00/0.89 Overvoltage category III, pollution severity 3 Ratedinsulationvoltage 500 V AC, 600 V DC Test voltage.5 kv Current rating of resistor elements See Table on page 3/35 ofterminals In intermittent duty In continuous duty 40 or 50 A 5 or 00 A Resistance tolerances ±0% depending on load Ambient temperature 5to+45 C Permissible motor power output (see Selecting table on page 3/35) At ambient temperatures > 45 C the power must be reduced by 3 % per 5 K temperature rise. Degree of protection to DIN or IEC 44 IP 00, IP 0 (normal version) and IP 3 Coating RAL 703, slate gray Conductor cross-sections For main conductor Connection for main conductor Connection for protective conductor At 40 A 6mm² M5 M5 At > 40 A 5 mm² xm5 (claw-type terminal) M5 Characteristic rotor resistance k = u See Selecting table on pages /8 to /4 and /4 to /4 for values for Siemens motors. i 3 (u = rotor standstill voltage i = rotor rated current) Siemens HE /33

101 Systemcomponents Resistor units Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Selecting and ordering data Wire-wound For Cyclic duration factor Char. rotor Boxes Degree of Degree of Degree of Weight resistor units rotor resistance k, required protection protection protection for rated 5 % 5 % 40 % 60 % see tech. data IP 00 IP 0 IP 3 IP 0 current (max. permissible =any) (normal version) Usable for motor power The Order No. applies to box. outputs up to A kw kw kw kw min. permissible Qty Order No. and code KY Order No. and code KY Order No. and code KY approx. kg For circuits ak, uk, csak any any 3PP 345-3FZ 3PP 355-3GZ 3PP 346-3FZ 3PP 356-3GZ 3PP 347-3FZ 3PP 357-3GZ any any any 3PP 355-3HZ 3PP 365-3KZ 3PP 365-3MZ 3PP 356-3HZ 3PP 366-3KZ 3PP 366-3MZ 3PP 357-3HZ 3PP 367-3KZ 3PP 367-3MZ PP 365-3KZ 3PP 365-3MZ 3PP 366-3KZ 3PP 366-3MZ 3PP 367-3KZ 3PP 367-3MZ any 3PP 355-6GZ 3PP 356-6GZ 3PP 357-6GZ any any 3PP 365-6KZ 3PP 365-6MZ 3PP 366-6KZ 3PP 366-6MZ 3PP 367-6KZ 3PP 367-6MZ PP 365-6KZ 3PP 365-6MZ 3PP 366-6KZ 3PP 366-6MZ 3PP 367-6KZ 3PP 367-6MZ 5 For circuits ehk, ek, csk any any 3PP 355-3GZ 3PP 355-3HZ 3PP 356-3GZ 3PP 356-3HZ 3PP 357-3GZ 3PP 357-3HZ any any 3. 3PP 365-3KZ 3PP 365-3MZ 3PP 365-3KZ 3PP 366-3KZ 3PP 366-3MZ 3PP 366-3KZ 3PP 367-3KZ 3PP 367-3MZ 3PP 367-3KZ PP 365-3MZ 3PP 365-3MZ 3PP 366-3MZ 3PP 366-3MZ 3PP 367-3MZ 3PP 367-3MZ any any 3PP 355-6GZ 3PP 365-6KZ 3PP 356-6GZ 3PP 366-6KZ 3PP 357-6GZ 3PP 367-6KZ any 3. 3PP 365-6MZ 3PP 365-6KZ 3PP 366-6MZ 3PP 366-6KZ 3PP 367-6MZ 3PP 367-6KZ PP 365-6MZ 3PP 365-6MZ 3PP 366-6MZ 3PP 366-6MZ 3PP 367-6MZ 3PP 367-6MZ 5 5 Component selection for the resistor units at the factory depends on the customer s specifications. The following data are required for planning/specifying the elements: Hoisting gear circuit and control characteristics Rotor rated current i Rotor standstill voltage u or k value and cyclic duration factor Number of starting stages Number of phases for the resistor unit (single or three-phase) Degree of protection Firstly, the resistance value for each starting stage of a phase is calculated and the number of wire-wound resistor elements is determined accordingtotheadjacenttable(page 3/35). It is expedient to draw all the resistor elements per phase in a sketch. With a three-phase unit, the number of resistor elements per phase should be tripled. Then, from the sketch, the number of all required terminals is determined according to size (40 A or 50 A). Depending on the number of resistor elements and the number of terminals, the order number of the appropriate resistor box can then be found in the adjacent table (page 3/35). A resistor unit can comprise several boxes. For repeat orders, it is sufficient to specify the order number and serial number of the unit previously delivered. The required resistor elements 3PY6 should be selected according to permissible load, cyclic duration factor and resistance value. For reasons of strength, adjusting clamps should only be used for wires 0.4 mm diameter. If resistors 3PY6 00 are used individually without a housing, they can be loaded at 0 % of the specified current values. Where two or more resistors elements are arranged side by side, a mid-clearance of 50 mm must be provided. 3/34 Siemens HE. 999

102 Systemcomponents Resistor units Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Selecting and ordering data Resistor elements Permissible load ) for cycle duration / cycle duration factor Total resistance value Stages Wire diam. No. of turns Order No. Weight approx. min min min min min 0 min I II III 5 % 5 % 40 % 60 % 00 % 5% A A A A A A Ω Ω Ω Ω mm kg With resistance wire NiCr 300 (WM 00) PY6 00-0A 3PY6 00-0B PY6 00-0C PY6 00-0D With resistance PY6 00-A 0.3 wire CuNi 44 (WM 50) PY6 00-B 3PY6 00-C PY6 00-D 3PY6 00-E PY6 00-H PY6 00-J PY6 00-K 3PY6 00-L PY6 00-3A PY6 00-3B 3PY6 00-3C PY6 00-3J 3PY6 00-3K PY6 00-4C PY6 00-4D 3PY6 00-4G PY6 00-4H 3PY6 00-4J 3PY6 00-4K PY6 00-5A PY6 00-5B 3PY6 00-5E PY6 00-5G 3PY6 00-5H PY6 00-6C 3PY6 00-6E 3PY6 00-6F 0.3 With resistance PY6 00-0D 0.3 wire NiCr ) PY6 00-0F (WM 0), glazed ) PY6 00-0G PY6 00-0H 0.60 ) ) PY6 00-0J 0.37 ) 0.37 ) ) PY6 00-0L ) 0.30 ) 0.30 ) PY6 00-0M 0.8 ) ) ) ) ) PY6 00-0P 0. ) 0.06 ) 0. ) 0.06 ) 0. ) 0.06 ) 0. ) 0.06 ) 0. ) 0.06 ) 0. ) 0.06 ) PY6 00-0R 3PY6 00-0U 3 Siemens HE /35

103 Systemcomponents Resistor units Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Selecting and ordering data Max. number of resistor elements Max. number of terminals for intermittent duty Degree of protection IP 0 (normal version) Degree of protection IP 3 Degree of protection IP 00 Weight for IP 0 40 A 50 A The Order No. applies to box. Quantity Quantity Quantity Order No. and code KY Order No. and code KY Order No. and code KY approx. kg 4 3PP 36-0AZ - 3PP 35-0AZ AZ - -AZ 3 4 3PP 36-0BZ - 3PP 35-0BZ BZ - -BZ 4 4 3PP 336-0CZ 3PP 337-0CZ 3PP 335-0CZ CZ -CZ -CZ -CZ -CZ -CZ CZ -4CZ -3CZ -4CZ -3CZ -4CZ 6 4 3PP 336-0DZ 3PP 337-0DZ 3PP 335-0DZ DZ -DZ -3DZ -DZ -DZ -3DZ -DZ -DZ -3DZ 0 4 3PP 346-0FZ 3PP 347-0FZ 3PP 345-0FZ FZ -FZ -FZ -FZ -FZ -FZ FZ -4FZ -3FZ -4FZ -3FZ -4FZ 5 4 3PP 356-0GZ 3PP 357-0GZ 3PP 355-0GZ GZ -GZ -GZ -GZ -GZ -GZ GZ -4GZ -5GZ -3GZ -4GZ -5GZ -3GZ -4GZ -5GZ 4 3PP 356-0HZ 3PP 357-0HZ 3PP 355-0HZ HZ -HZ -HZ -HZ -HZ -HZ HZ -4HZ -5HZ -3HZ -4HZ -5HZ -3HZ -4HZ -5HZ 7 4 3PP 366-0JZ 3PP 367-0JZ 3PP 365-0JZ JZ -JZ -JZ -JZ -JZ -JZ JZ -4JZ -5JZ -3JZ -4JZ -5JZ -3JZ -4JZ -5JZ PP 366-0KZ 3PP 367-0KZ 3PP 365-0KZ KZ -KZ -KZ -KZ -KZ -KZ KZ -4KZ -5KZ -3KZ -4KZ -5KZ -3KZ -4KZ -5KZ KZ -7KZ -6KZ -7KZ -6KZ -7KZ PP 366-0LZ 3PP 367-0LZ 3PP 365-0LZ LZ -LZ -LZ -LZ -LZ -LZ LZ -4LZ -5LZ -3LZ -4LZ -5LZ -3LZ -4LZ -5LZ LZ -7LZ -6LZ -7LZ -6LZ -7LZ PP 366-0MZ 3PP 367-0MZ 3PP 365-0MZ MZ -MZ -MZ -MZ -MZ -MZ MZ -4MZ -5MZ -3MZ -4MZ -5MZ -3MZ -4MZ -5MZ MZ -7MZ -6MZ -7MZ -6MZ -7MZ 3/36 Siemens HE. 999

104 Systemcomponents Resistor units Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Selecting and ordering data To be specified with the order:. Order No. from the above table e.g. 3PP 35-0AZ. Code K0Y } K0Y 3. Number and total resistance of resistor elements 4. Wiring diagram of the resistor unit 5. Any other special requests, such as different coating for housing Spare parts 3PY Stufen III II I 3PY Description Order No. Weight approx. kg Wire-wound resistor elements See selection data in table on page 3/35 Sheet metal support for 3PP 3, 3PP 33, 3PP 34 for 3PP 35, 3PP 36 Adjusting clamp without connecting wire with bead-insulated connecting wire approx. 90 mm long 3PY A 3PY B 3PY A 3PY B Siemens HE /37

105 Systemcomponents Resistor units Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Dimension drawings Wire-wound resistor units 3PP Typ Degree of protection a b c d e f g h i k l m z 3PP 36 3PP 336 3PP 337 3PP 346 3PP 347 3PP 356 3PP 357 3PP 366 3PP 367 IP 0 IP 0 IP 3 IP 0 IP 3 IP 0 IP 3 IP 0 IP x6 3x6 3x6 4x0 4x0 4x0 4x0 5x0 5x Cable routing for 3PP Wire-wound resistor elements 3PY6 Rubber grommets (as supplied) Heavy-gage connection 3 Compression gland Openings are provided for the cable entries which are fitted with rubber grommets as supplied. 3/38 Siemens HE. 999

106 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 3 Description Product range and application Resistor units with normal stacking, see Section "Selecting and ordering data" on page 3/44 ff. Resistor units with special stacking (on request) Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 are available in five box sizes. For hoisting gear circuits, three-phase resistor units with normal stacking of sizes 4, 6 and 8 are mainly used. With resistor units in normal stacking, the internal installation of elements is already established. Resistor units 3PR3 in conjunction with contactor control are used for starting and controlling three-phase motors with slipring rotors, and additionally as load and series resistors. Regulations The resistor units comply with the "Regulations for low-voltage switchgear", DIN VDE Climatic resistance Conformity of the units with the safety regulations of the EU guideline for low-voltage apparatus of February 9, 973 is thus simultaneously declared. Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 can be used under the following climatic conditions: Climatic regions A, F, H, M and T to DIN 50 09, Part Climatic group "General" to IEC 7-- Climatic classes J3, A and F to Siemens standard SN 9 070, Part In a maritime climate with simultaneous, high degree of air pollution, we recommend steel grid resistor units. Design Resistor units 3PR3 consist of cast-iron resistor elements 3PY6 0 which are integrated in a sheet steel housing. All housing parts are zinc-plated or made of stainless steel. The units are supplied without coating. Ceramic strips serve for retaining and insulating the resistor elements in the housing. The connecting area is segregated from the heat source (resistor stack) by a heat partition. The leads are connected via connection elements screwed onto the resistor elements. The connection elements are supported by a ceramic holder and good strain relief is thus ensured. Each resistor element can be equipped with such connection elements. The subsequent addition of accessories or transfers at the installation site can be easily implemented. To prevent vibration with castiron elements WE 5 to WE 700, they are embedded in the ceramic intermediate strip with acid-resisting cement. Ceramic intermediate element Connection element 3 Ceramic strips to protect the castiron elements from lead strain 4 Support sheet with clamp designation for ceramics elements Siemens HE /39

107 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Description Installation Up to three resistor boxes can be vertically grouped to reduce the footprint. For data on vertical grouping, see the dimension drawings on page 3/48 ff. The resistor units are designed for self-cooling. The ventilating air must be able to enter and exit unimpeded. When loaded with the values specified on the rating plate, the outlet air temperature rise does not exceed 60 K; see DIN VDE 0660, Part 3, Section 58. An outlet air temperature of 00 K is obtained by reducing the power output at 60 K to 75 %. This power reduction can be dispensed with if the unit has forced ventilation. If the air flow is impeded, the temperature rise of all components can quickly reach excessive values. The resistor units should therefore be installed in well ventilated rooms. It should be noted that each unit converts approximately the following power values to heat. Three vertically grouped boxes 3PR3 8; degree of protection IP 0 To ensure good ventilation, resistor units 3PR3 must be installed horizontally. Where a resistor unit comprises two or more boxes, they are always supplied individually. The fitting of additional covers to increase the degree of protection, the assembling of two or more boxes and electrical connections of the individual boxes must always be carried out on site. Resistor units 3PR3, three boxes grouped vertically Type 3PR PR PR PR3 60 3PR The powers in the above table refer to an arrangement with three boxes grouped vertically as is usually the case with Power converted to heat at 00 % CDF per box kw hoisting gear. If only two boxes are grouped, these values can be increased by 5 %, and by 46 % for a single box. Maintenance Resistor units operate without maintenance. When used in a dust-laden atmosphere, it is advisable to blow the units out with dry compressed air from time to time. Connecting the cables The terminals of the resistor elements are at the front of all units. When connecting the cables or leads, heat emission of the resistor units should be taken into account. The cables or leads should be routed to each box from the side so that the cables are not in the area of emitted warm air and heat emission. DIN VDE 098, Parts 3 or 4 should be observed for load ratings. It is advisable to use either cables and leads for increased conductor temperature (at least 90 C), such as (N)XH or NSSHÖU or for normal conductor temperature (70 C), such as NYY, with heat-resistant sleeving pulled over the ends of the leads in the area of emitted heat. Cast-iron resistor elements 3PY6 0 Resistor unit Single-phase No. of elements Type 3PR PR PR PR PR Three-phase No. of elements per phase 3/40 Siemens HE. 999

108 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Technical data Creepage distances and clearances to DIN VDE 00/0.89 Overvoltage category III, pollution severity 3 Ratedinsulationvoltage 500 V AC, 800 V DC Test voltage 3.5 kv Current rating of resistor units See Table on pages 3/44 to 3/45 of resistor elements See Table on page 3/46 Resistor elements Rated value 0 % above the cold value 8 % under the value at operating temperature Production tolerance ±0 % Ambient temperature 55to+45 C Permissible motor power output See selecting tables At ambient temperatures > 45 C the power output must be reduced by 3 % per 5 K temperature rise. Degree of protection to DIN or IEC 44 IP 00; also IP 0, IP 3, IP 0 and IP 3 by means of kits Unit surface No coating Housing parts: zinc-plated steel Covers: high-grade steel Conductor cross sections for main conductor Max. x 0 mm² or x 50 mm² 3 Connection for main conductor Connection for protective conductor (see page 3/5 Connecting the cables ) Characteristic rotor resistance u k = i 3 M (for busbar or conductor connection) M0 See Selecting table on pages /8 to /4 and /4 to /4 for values for Siemens motors. (u = rotor standstill voltage i = rotor rated current) Selecting and ordering data: 3PR3 with normal stacking according to circuit and motor power output Versions The resistor installation of more boxes. Each resistor unit The following are available: The reinforced complement these units is already estab- consists of one or more resis-. Three-phase resistor units relates to resistance stages lished. The stages can be adtor boxes. The three-phase with normal stacking and 0- and -. justed within certain limits to arrangement is intended for uniform resistor element These can be loaded with suit the actual circumstances three-phase rotor circuits. Re- complement..4-times the value of current on site. The terminals have sistor units with normal stack- uniform designations, facilitating the drawing up of a termi- spare parts for large installa- with normal stacking and ing facilitate the storage of. Three-phase resistor units giveninthesummarytablefor the relevant unit. nal diagram for an entire resistions. partly reinforced completor unit assembled from two or ment. Siemens HE /4

109 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Selecting and ordering data: 3PR3 with normal stacking according to circuit and motor power output Cast-iron resistor Cyclic duration factor Char. rotor resistance k, Boxes Degree of Weight units 5 % 5 % 40 % 60 % (min. permissible = any) required protection IP 00 three-phase per box Usable for motor power outputs up to max. max. Order No. and kw kw kw kw permissible permissible Quantity Code KY approx. kg For circuits»ak«,»csakuk«ak, uk, csak PR3 40-3Z 3PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z PR3 40-3Z 3PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 60-3Z any any any 3 3 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z any any any any any any PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z any any any any any any any any PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z For circuits»ehk«,»csk«ehk, csk PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 40-3Z any 3PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z any any any PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z any any any PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z any any any PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z For circuits»ek«ek PR3 40-3Z 3PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 60-3Z PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 60-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z any any any PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z any any any any PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z 3PR3 80-3Z /4 Siemens HE. 999

110 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Selecting and ordering data: 3PR3 with normal stacking according to circuit and motor power output The following data are re- Hoisting gear circuit and Rotor standstill voltage u or Number of phases for the quired for planning/selecting control characteristics k value and cyclic duration resistor unit (single or the resistor units: Rotor rated current factor three-phase) Number of starting stages Degree of protection 3 Siemens HE /43

111 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Selecting and ordering data: 3PR3 with normal stacking The current values listed relate If only two boxes are grouped, to the usual arrangement for these values can be in- hoisting gear of three boxes creased by %, and by grouped vertically. % for a single box (see also page 3/40, Section "Installation"). For kits for increasing the degree of protection from IP 00 to IP 0, IP 3, IP 0 or IP 3, refer to the table "Kits for increasing the degree of protection" on page 3/46. Load rating of resistor units with 0 s cycle duration and cyclic duration factor of 5 % 5 % 40 % 60 % 00 % Fitted resistor elements per phase Total resistance Fitted resistor elements per phase Total resistance A A A A A Quantity x designation Ω Quantity x designation Ω Uniform complement xWE4.7 3xWE6.5 3xWE9 3x0.04 3x0.09 3x0.07 5xWE4.7 5xWE6.5 5xWE9 3x0.03 3x0.03 3x xWE.5 3xWE7.5 3xWE4 3x x0.05 3x0.07 5xWE.5 5xWE7.5 5xWE4 3x0.06 3x x xWE34 3xWE47 3xWE65 3x0. 3x0.4 3x0.95 5xWE34 5xWE47 5xWE65 3x0.7 3x0.3 3x xWE90 3xWE5 3xWE75 3x0.7 3x0.37 3x0.5 5xWE90 5xWE5 5xWE75 3x0.45 3x0.6 3x xWE40 3xWE360 3xWE500 3xWE700 3x0.7 3x. 3x.5 3x. 5xWE40 5xWE360 5xWE500 5xWE700 3x. 3x.8 3x.5 3x3.5 Box size 0 Terminal diagrams per phase: Terminal diagram No. A Terminal diagram No. A Terminal designation per phase: Partialvaluesin%oftotalresistance: Partly reinforced 480 complement 40 with.4-times the current 335 rating for resistance stages 0- and Box size Terminal diagrams per phase: Terminal designation per phase: Partialvaluesin%oftotalresistance: 3/44 Siemens HE. 999

112 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Selecting and ordering data: 3PR3 with normal stacking Ordering examples: Cast-iron resistor unit with normal stacking, three-phase version Size 6, degree of protection IP 0 Specify on the order: Cast-iron resistor unit with normal stacking, three-phase version Partly reinforced complement Total resistance 3 x 0.08 Ω Order No. 3PR3 60-3C Size 8 Specify on the order: Kit to increase degree of protection to IP 0 Order No. 3PX6 3-6A Degree of protection IP 00 Total resistance 3 x 0. Ω Order No. 3PR3 80-4D Fitted resistor elements per phase Total resistance Fitted resistor elements per phase Total resistance Fitted resistor elements per phase Total resistance Degree of protection IP 00 Three-phase version Quantity x designation Ω Quantity x designation Ω Quantity x designation Ω Order No. 7 x WE x WE x WE 9 3x0.03 3x0.04 3x0.06 9xWE4.7 9xWE6.5 9xWE9 3x0.04 3x0.06 3x0.08 x WE 4.7 x WE 6.5 x WE 9 3x0.05 3x0.07 3x0. 7 x WE.5 7 x WE 7.5 7xWE4 3x0.09 3x0. 3x0.7 9xWE.5 9xWE7.5 9xWE4 3x0. 3x0.5 3x0. x WE.5 x WE 7.5 x WE 4 3x0.4 3x0.9 3x0.6 7xWE34 7xWE47 7xWE65 3x0.4 3x0.33 3x0.45 9xWE34 9xWE47 9xWE65 3x0.30 3x0.4 3x0.58 x WE 34 x WE 47 x WE 65 3x0.37 3x0.5 3x0.7 7xWE90 7 x WE 5 7 x WE 75 3x0.63 3x0.87 3x. 9xWE90 9xWE5 9xWE75 3x0.8 3x. 3x.55 x WE 90 x WE 5 x WE 75 3x 3x.4 3x.9 7 x WE 40 7 x WE x WE x WE 700 3x.65 3x.5 3x3.5 3x4.9 9xWE40 9xWE360 9xWE500 9xWE700 3x.5 3x3. 3x4.5 3x6.3 x WE 40 x WE 360 x WE 500 x WE 700 3x.6 3x4 3x5.5 3x Terminal diagram No. A Terminal diagram No. A Terminal diagram No. A xwe4.7 +5xWE9 3x0.055 xwe4.7 +7xWE9 3x0.07 x WE x WE 9 3x0.09 xwe6.5 +5xWE.5 3x0.075 xwe6.5 +7xWE.5 3x0. x WE x WE.5 3x0. xwe9 +5xWE7.5 3x0. xwe9 +7xWE7.5 3x0.4 x WE x WE 7.5 3x0.7 x WE x WE 4 3x0.5 xwe.5 +7xWE4 3x0.9 x WE x WE 4 3x0.4 x WE x WE 34 3x0. xwe7.5 +7xWE34 3x0.7 x WE x WE 34 3x0.34 x WE x WE 47 3x0.8 xwe4 +7xWE47 3x0.38 xwe4 +9xWE47 3x0.47 x WE x WE 65 3x0.4 xwe34 +7xWE65 3x0.5 xwe34 +9xWE65 3x0.65 x WE x WE 90 3x0.55 xwe47 +7xWE90 3x0.7 xwe47 +9xWE90 3x0.9 xwe65 +5xWE5 3x0.75 x WE x WE 5 3x.0 xwe65 +9xWE5 3x.5 xwe90 +5xWE75 3x.05 x WE x WE 75 3x.4 xwe90 +9xWE75 3x.75 x WE x WE 40 3x.45 xwe5 +7xWE40 3x.9 x WE x WE 40 3x.4 x WE x WE 360 3x. xwe75 +7xWE360 3x.9 x WE x WE 360 3x3.6 x WE x WE 500 3x3.3 xwe40 +7xWE500 3x4 x WE x WE 500 3x5 x WE x WE 700 3x4. xwe360 +7xWE700 3x5.6 x WE x WE 700 3x Terminal diagram No. A Terminal diagram No. A Terminal diagram No. A Siemens HE /45

113 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Accessories Degree of protection IP 00 Degree of protection IP 0 Degree of protection IP 0 Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 are normally supplied in degree of protection IP 00. Kits areavailabletoincreasethe degree of protection to IP 0, IP 3, IP 0 or IP 3. The kits should be selected in regard to size, type of installation (single or vertically grouped) and number of boxes. Ordering example: For resistor unit 3PR comprising 7 boxes, the degree of protection is to be increased from IP 00 to IP 3. x 3 boxes will be grouped vertically and x box set up individually. The following are required: Order No. Quantity kits for degree of protection IP 3 for the vertical grouping of 3 boxes 3PX6 5-8C kit for degree of protection IP 3 for setting up individually 3PX6 5-8A Kits for increasing the degree of protection For degree of protection IP 0 For degree of protection IP 3 For degree of protection IP 0 For degree of protection IP 3 Kit contains Protective screen at top and sides Perforated cover plate, side plates, base plate and cable entry strip Terminal box, side plates, base plate and cable entry strip For resistor unit 3PR3 00 3PR3 0 3PR3 40 3PR3 60 3PR3 80 Cover and side plates 3PR3 60 3PR3 80 3PR3 00 3PR3 0 3PR3 40 3PR3 60 3PR3 80 Individual set-up 3PX6 3-0A -A -4A 3PX6 3-6A -8A 3PX6 4-6A -8A 3PX6 6-0A -A -4A 3PX6 6-6A -8A Weight approx. For vertical grouping of boxes Weight For vertical approx. grouping of 3boxes Type Order No. kg Order No. kg Order No. kg PX6 3-0B -B -4B 3PX6 3-6B -8B 3PX6 4-6B -8B 3PX6 6-0B -B -4B 3PX6 6-6B -8B 3PX6 3-0C -C -4C 3PX6 3-6C -8C 3PX6 6-0C -C -4C 3PX6 6-6C -8C ) 3PR3 80 3PX6 5-8A 4.6 3PX6 5-8B 9.6 3PX6 5-8C PX6 4-6C -8C Weight approx ) For setting up individually, a cover is supplied instead of the terminal box. 3/46 Siemens HE. 999

114 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Spare parts 3PY6 0 3PY6 030A 3PY6 03C 3PY6 04D Description Order No. Weight approx. kg Resistor elements WE 4.7 to WE 700 Connecting kit With terminal offset top and bottom kit comprising 3 ceramic holders for connection elements 6 connection elements with screw M connecting screws M0 See Table "Resistor elements" on page 3/47 3PY6 04-A. Ceramic spacer required per element 3PY6 03-0A 0. Ceramic holder For connection elements 3PY6 04-C 0.9 Connection element With screw M 3PY6 04-D 0.5 container of cement compound HES ) 3PX6 06-0A.0 3 Type 3PR3 00 3PR3 0 3PR3 40 3PR3 60 3PR3 80 Required amount of cement compound for unit: 0.6 kg 0.8 kg 0.8 kg.0 kg. kg Resistor elements Permissible load at 0 s cycle duration and cyclic duration factor of 5 % 5% 40 % 60 % 00 % Resistance values Rated value ± 0 % Cold value approx. A A A A A Ω Ω Ω Warm value approx With offset for connection below WE 4.7 WE 6.5 WE 9 WE.5 WE 7.5 WE 4 WE 34 WE 47 WE 65 WE 90 WE 5 WE 75 WE 40 WE 360 WE 500 WE 700 Order No. 3PY6 0-3A -3B -3C 3PY6 0-3D -3E -3F 3PY6 0-3G -3H -3J 3PY6 0-3K -3L -3M 3PY6 0-3N -3P -3R -3S With offset for connection above Designation Designation Order No. kg WE 4.7/0 WE 6.5/0 WE 9/0 WE.5/0 WE 7.5/0 WE 4/0 WE 34/0 WE 47/0 WE 65/0 WE 90/0 WE 5/0 WE 75/0 WE 40/0 WE 360/0 WE 500/0 WE 700/0 3PY6 0-4A -4B -4C 3PY6 0-4D -4E -4F 3PY6 0-4G -4H -4J 3PY6 0-4K -4L -4M 3PY6 0-4N -4P -4R -4S Weight approx ) Resistor elements WE 5... WE 700 and WE 5/0... WE 700/0 are embedded in the resistor units with cement compound. When replacement resistor elements of these sizes are ordered, the required cement compound must also be ordered to secure the resistor elements after replacement. Preparing the cement compound: 600 g HES in a measuring vessel is poured into the stirring vessel with 75 g of water (measured); a twirling stick is then used to knead it into a viscous compound which must then be used immediately. Siemens HE /47

115 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Dimension drawings Cast-iron resistor elements 3PY6 0 Cast-iron resistor elements 3PR3 for setting up individually Dimensions for all units where specified in drawings Dimension C for vertical grouping Dimension D = minimum height of clearance in air above top of box for degrees of protection Degree of Boxes grouped IP 00, IP 0, IP 0 protectiont vertically Type A B 3 3PR IP Individual set-up 50 3PR IP Vertical grouping 50 3PR IP PR IP PR IP A maximum of 3 resistor Height for setting up boxes can be grouped individually vertically. Degree of H Resistor boxes and kits for protection increasing the degree of IP protection are supplied separately. IP $ Base clearance of 50 mm required. % Cable entry strip for degree of protection IP 0 and IP 3 & The hexagon bolts M x 5, nuts and spring washers required for setting up must be provided by the customer. ( Terminal box (without resistor complement) 3/48 Siemens HE. 999

116 Systemcomponents Resistor units Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 Dimension drawings Cast-iron resistor units 3PR3 for vertical grouping 0 - # # +,! & 0 - # & +,! '! 3 # ) * # # & " # ", A C HA A B F H JA? JE # ) # # & " * "! &, A C HA A B F H JA? JE M EJD F H JA? JEL A I? HA A "! ' $ 0 - # $ 0 - # ' # ) # # & " * " "!, A C HA A B F H JA? JE! M EJD? L A H O B H > N I E A $ &! ' $ # & " # # # & " & % # " "!, A C HA A B F H JA? JE! M EJD JA H E = > N O B H > N I E A & 0 - # % + ), + + ) ) ) )! "!!! # ) # # & " * "! %, A C HA A B F H JA? JE M EJD? L A H Siemens HE /49

117 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Description Product range Resistor units with normal stacking (see also Section "Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 according to circuit and motor power output" (page 3/53) and "3PS3 with normal stacking" (page 3/54)) Resistor units with special stacking (on request) Applications See also Section "Summary" on page 3/9. Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 are available in five box sizes. For hoisting gear circuits, three-phase normal resistor units of sizes 4, 6 and 8 are mainly used. With resistor units of normal stacking, the complement is already established. Resistor units 3PS3 in conjunction with contactor control serve for starting and controlling three-phase induction motors with slipring rotors, and as load and series resistors. Regulations Climatic resistance Design The resistor units comply with the "Regulations for low-voltage switchgear", DIN VDE Conformity of the units with the safety regulations of the EU guideline for low-voltage apparatus of February 9, 973 is thus simultaneously declared. Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 can be used under the following climatic conditions: Climatic regions A, F, H, M and T to DIN 50 09, Part "General" climatic group to IEC 7-- Climatic classes J3, A and F to Siemens standard SN 9 070, Part. Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 contain resistor elements made of high-alloy sheet steel which are non-scaling, even at high operating temperatures. The elements are insulated from each other and from the housing by ceramic insulating bushes. Bars are welded in to connect the resistor elements. The connection elements are welded onto the steel grids in such a way that the leads can be connected with cap screws (M). The housings are the same as those of cast-iron resistor units 3PR3. A combination of both types is therefore possible for resistor units comprising two or more boxes (and is expedient for resistance stages with high resistance values). The units are supplied without coating. All sheet metal parts are zinc-plated or made of stainless steel. 3/50 Siemens HE. 999

118 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Description Installation The resistor units are designed for self-cooling and must be installed horizontally and with a view to good ventilation. When loaded at the values specified on the rating plate, temperature rise of the outlet air does not exceed 00 K. If the air flow is impeded, the temperature rise of all components can quickly reach excessive values. It should be noted that each unit converts approximately the following power to heat: Type Power converted to heat with 00 % CDF kw 3PS PS PS PS PS Where a resistor unit comprises two or more boxes, they are always supplied individually. Assembly and electrical connection of the individual boxes must be carried out on site. 3 Resistor grids 3PY6 The resistor elements are made of high-alloy sheet steel. A fixed and immovable retaining bar at the top and bottom of the resistor grids prevents short-circuits between them. The adjacent table shows the number of resistor grids per unit: Resistor unit Single-phase Three-phase Number of elements Type Number of elements per phase 3PS PS PS PS PS Connecting the cables The terminals for the resistor grids are at the front of all units. Heat emission should be taken into account when connecting the cables or leads. The cables or leads should be routed to each box from the side, so that they are not in the area of the warm air flow and emitted heat. DIN VDE 098, Part 3 or 4 should be observed for load ratings. We recommend the use of cables and leads for increased conductor temperature (at least 90 C), for example (N)XH or NSSHÖU. With cables and leads for normal conductor temperature (70 C), for example NYY, whose ends are in the area of heat emission, heat-resistant sleeving should be pulled over the ends subjected to heat. The terminals are accessible after removing the front cover of the unit. To maintain this accessibility when two or more boxes are grouped vertically, it is advisable to route the bunched cables and leads to each box from the side, and any vertical leads should be positioned at the front of the boxes. To maintain the insulation of cables and leads, it is not permissible to route them between two or more resistor boxes in the area of air flow. Siemens HE /5

119 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Technical data Creepage distances and clearances to DIN VDE 00/0.89 Overvoltage category III, pollution severity 3 Ratedinsulationvoltage 000 V AC, 00 V DC Test voltage 3.5 kv Current rating of the resistor units See page 3/54 and oftheresistorgrids see page 3/57 Resistor elements Rated value 0 % over the cold value 5 % under the value at operating temperature Production tolerance ±0 % Ambient temperature 5to+45 C Permissible motor power output See selecting tables At ambient temperatures >45 C the power should be reduced by 5 % per 5 K temperature rise. Degree of protection to DIN or IEC 44 IP 00; also IP 0, IP 3, IP 0 and IP 3 by means of kits Unit surface No coating Housing parts: zinc-plated steel Covers: high-grade steel Conductor cross-sections Bar or for main conductor max. x 0 mm or x 50 mm Connection for main conductor M (for bar or conductor connection) Connection for protective conductor (Please observe "Connecting the cables" on page 3/5 when routing the leads.) Characteristic rotor resistance u k = i 3 M0 See tables on page /8 ff. and /4 ff. for values for Siemens motors. (u = rotor standstill voltage i = rotor rated voltage) Selecting and ordering data: 3PS3 with normal stacking according to circuit and motor power output These units allow adaptation Each resistor unit comprises The following are available: With these units, the first of the stages to the operating one or more boxes and con-. Three-phase normal resistor twostages(forsizes4and conditions on site, within tains three identical internal units with uniform comple- 6) or the first three stages certain limits. resistor elements (phases). ment of resistor elements. (for size 8) are reinforced The terminal designations are The three-phase arrangement and can be subjected to uniform (see also pages 3/54 is intended for three-phase. Three-phase normal resistor.4-times the value of cur- and 3/55), which facilitates the rotor circuits. Resistor units units with partly reinforced rent specified in the sum- drawing up of a terminal diagram for a resistor unit con- the storage of spare parts for unit. sisting of two or more boxes. large with normal stacking facilitate complement: mary table for the relevant installations. 3/5 Siemens HE. 999

120 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Selecting and ordering data: 3PS3 with normal stacking according to circuit and motor power output Steel grid resistor units Cyclic duration factor Degree of protection IP 00, three-phase Consisting of 5 % 40 % 60 % The Order No. applies to one unit boxes Usable for motor power outputs up to Order No. and Weight approx. kw kw kw Code KY kg Quantity For circuit uk PS Z 3PS Z 3PS Z PS3 40-3Z 3PS3 60-3Z 3PS3 80-3Z PS3 60-3Z 3PS3 80-3Z 3PS Z PS Z 3PS Z 3PS Z PS Z 3PS Z For circuit ak, csak PS Z 3PS Z 3PS Z PS3 40-3Z 3PS3 60-3Z 3PS3 80-3Z PS3 60-3Z 3PS3 80-3Z 3PS Z PS Z 3PS Z 3PS Z PS Z 3PS Z For circuit eh, csk PS Z 3PS Z 3PS Z PS3 40-3Z 3PS3 60-3Z 3PS3 80-3Z PS3 60-3Z 3PS3 80-3Z 3PS Z PS Z 3PS Z 3PS Z PS Z 3PS Z For circuit ek PS3 40-3Z 3PS3 60-3Z 3PS3 80-3Z PS3 60-3Z 3PS3 80-3Z 3PS Z PS Z 3PS Z 3PS Z PS Z 3PS Z The following data are required for configuring/ selecting the resistor units: Hoisting gear circuit and control characteristics Rotor rated current Rotor standstill voltage u or k value and cyclic duration factor Number of starting stages Number of phase for the resistor unit (single or three-phase) Degree of protection Siemens HE /53

121 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Selecting and ordering data: 3PS3 with normal stacking The current values listed relate Kits for increasing the degree to the usual arrangement for of protection from IP 00 to hoisting gear of three boxes IP0,IP3,IP0orIP3 grouped vertically. are listed in the table "Kits for increasing the degree of protection" on page 3/46. Load rating of resistor units with 0 s cycle duration and cyclic duration factor of 5 % 5 % 40 % 60 % 00 % Fitted resistor grid complement per phase Total resistance Fitted resistor grid complement per phase Total resistance A A A A A Quantity x designation Ω Quantity x designation Ω Uniform complement xWG0 4xWG5 4xWG 3x0.04 3x0.06 3x xWG0 5xWG5 5xWG 3x0.05 3x x xWG3 4xWG46 4xWG68 3x0.8 3x0.84 3x0.7 5xWG3 5xWG46 5xWG68 3x0.6 3x0.3 3x xWG00 4xWG50 4xWG0 3x0.4 3x0.6 3x0.88 5xWG00 5xWG50 5xWG0 3x0.5 3x0.75 3x xWG30 4xWG460 4xWG680 3x.8 3x.84 3x.7 5xWG30 5xWG460 5xWG680 3x.6 3x.3 3x x WG x WG x WG 00 4 x WG 300 3x4 3x6 3x8.8 3x.8 5 x WG x WG x WG 00 5 x WG 300 3x5 3x7.5 3x 3x6 Box size 0 Terminal diagrams per phase: Terminal diagram No. V Terminal diagram No. V Terminal designation per phase: Partialvaluesin%oftotalresistance: Partly reinforced complement with.4-times the current rating for resistance stages 0- and - (for box sizes 4 and 6): 0-, -3 and 3-5 (for box size 8) Box size Terminal diagrams per phase: Terminal designation per phase: Partialvaluesin%oftotalresistance: 3/54 Siemens HE. 999

122 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Selecting and ordering data: 3PS3 with normal stacking Ordering examples: Steel grid resistor unit with normal stacking, three-phase version Box size 8, degree of protection IP 0 Specify on the order: Steel grid resistor unit with normal stacking, three-phase version Partly reinforced complement Total resistance value 3 x 0.46 Ω Order No. 3PS E Box size 8 Specify on the order: Kit to increase degree of protection to IP 0 Order No. 3PX6 3-8A Degree of protection IP 00 Total resistance value 3 x 0.39 Ω Order No. 3PS E Fitted resistor grid complement per phase Total resistance Fitted resistor grid complement per phase Total resistance Fitted resistor grid complement per phase Total resistance Degree of protection IP 00 Three-phase version ( box) Quantity x designation Ω Quantity x designation Ω Quantity x designation Ω Order No. 7xWG0 7xWG5 7xWG 3x0.07 3x0. 3x0.54 8xWG0 8xWG5 8xWG 3x0.08 3x0. 3x0.8 0 x WG 0 0 x WG 5 0 x WG 3x0. 3x0.5 3x0. 7xWG3 7xWG46 7xWG68 3x0.4 3x0.3 3x0.48 8xWG3 8xWG46 8xWG68 3x0.6 3x0.37 3x x WG 3 0 x WG 46 0 x WG 68 3x0.3 3x0.46 3x xWG00 7xWG50 7xWG0 3x0.7 3x 3x.5 8xWG00 8xWG50 8xWG0 3x0.8 3x. 3x.8 0 x WG 00 0 x WG 50 0 x WG 0 3x 3x.5 3x. 7xWG30 7xWG460 7xWG680 3x. 3x3. 3x4.8 8xWG30 8xWG460 8xWG680 3x.6 3x3.7 3x5.4 0 x WG 30 0 x WG x WG 680 3x3. 3x4.6 3x x WG x WG x WG 00 7 x WG 300 3x7 3x0.5 3x5 3x 8 x WG x WG x WG 00 8 x WG 300 3x8 3x 3x7.6 3x5.6 0 x WG x WG x WG 00 0 x WG 300 3x0 3x5 3x 3x Terminal diagram No. V Terminal diagram No. V Terminal diagram No. V x WG x WG 3x0.4 xwg0 +6xWG 3x0.5 3xWG0 +7xWG 3x0.8 x WG x WG 3 3x0.0 xwg5 +6xWG3 3x0. 3xWG5 +7xWG3 3x0.7 x WG + 5 x WG 46 3x0.8 xwg +6xWG46 3x0.3 3xWG +7xWG46 3x0.39 x WG x WG 68 3x0.4 xwg3 +6xWG68 3x0.47 3xWG3 +7xWG68 3x0.57 x WG x WG 00 3x0.6 x WG x WG 00 3x0.69 3xWG46 +7xWG00 3x0.84 x WG x WG 50 3x0.9 x WG x WG 50 3x 3xWG68 +7xWG50 3x.5 xwg00 +5xWG0 3x.3 xwg00 +6xWG0 3x.5 3 x WG x WG 0 3x.85 xwg50 +5xWG30 3x.9 xwg50 +6xWG30 3x. 3 x WG x WG 30 3x.7 xwg0 +5xWG460 3x.7 xwg0 +6xWG460 3x3. 3 x WG x WG 460 3x3.9 xwg30 +5xWG680 3x4 xwg30 +6xWG680 3x4.7 3 x WG x WG 680 3x5.7 xwg460 +5xWG000 3x6 x WG x WG 000 3x6.9 3 x WG x WG 000 3x8.4 xwg680 +5xWG500 3x9 xwg680 +6xWG500 3x0.4 3 x WG x WG 500 3x.5 x WG x WG 00 x WG x WG 300 3x3 3x9 x WG x WG 00 x WG x WG 300 3x5 3x 3 x WG x WG 00 3 x WG x WG 300 3x8.4 3x Terminal diagram No. V Terminal diagram No. V Terminal diagram No. V Siemens HE /55

123 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Accessories Degree Degree of protection IP 00 of protection IP 0 Degree of protection IP 0 Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 are normally supplied in degree of protection IP 00. Kits are available to increase the degree of protection to IP 0, IP 3, IP 0 or IP 3. The kits should be selected in regard to size, type of installation (single or vertically grouped) and number of boxes. Ordering example: For resistor unit 3PS comprising 7 boxes, the degree of protection is to be increased from IP 00 to IP 3. x 3 boxes will be grouped vertically and x box set up individually. The following are required Order No. Quantity kits for degree of protection IP 3 for the vertical grouping of 3 boxes 3PX6 5-8C kit for degree of protection IP 3 for setting up individually 3PX6 5-8A Kits for increasing the degree of protection For degree of protection IP 0 For degree of protection IP 3 For degree of protection IP 0 For degree of protection IP 3 Kit contains Protective screen at top and sides For resistor unit Individual set-up Weight approx. For vertical grouping of boxes Weight For vertical approx. grouping of 3 boxes Type Order No. kg Order No. kg Order No. kg 3PS3 0 3PS3 3PS3 4 3PS3 6 3PS3 8 Cover and side plates 3PS3 6 3PS3 8 Perforated cover plate, side plates, base plate and cable entry strip Terminal box, side plates, base plate and cable entry strip 3PS3 0 3PS3 3PS3 4 3PS3 6 3PS3 8 3PX6 3-0A -A -4A 3PX6 3-6A -8A 3PX6 4-6A -8A 3PX6 6-0A -A -4A 3PX6 6-6A -8A PX6 3-0B -B -4B 3PX6 3-6B -8B 3PX6 4-6B -8B 3PX6 6-0B -B -4B 3PX6 6-6B -8B PX6 3-0C -C -4C 3PX6 3-6C -8C 3PX6 4-6C -8C 3PX6 6-0C -C -4C 3PX6 6-6C -8C ) 3PS3 8 3PX6 5-8A 4.6 3PX6 5-8B 9.6 3PX6 5-8C 30 Weight approx Spare parts Nut 7 Connecting bar Spring washer 8 Resistor grid 3 Front panel 9 Connection element with link 4 Cup spring 0 Link element 5 Bush Insulating bush 6 Connection element Support bolt Part No. (see exploded diagram) Description Order No. Weight approx. kg 8 Resistor grid WG 0 to WG 300 with and without connecting bars Insulating bush Bush at end of stack on left panel Insulating bush at end of stack on right panel Cup spring Connection element Connection element with link Link element Connecting bar See table "Resistor grids" on page 3/57 3PY6 30-0B 3PY6 30-0D 3PY6 30-0E 3PY A 3PY F 3PY G 3PY K 3PY L ) For setting up individually, a cover is supplied instead of the terminal box. 3/56 Siemens HE. 999

124 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Spare parts Resistor grids Permissible load at 0 s cycle Resistor grids Without Weight With connecting Weight duration and cyclic duration connecting bars approx. bars welded on approx. factor Designa- Rated Cold Warm tion value value value 5 % 5 % 40 % 60 % 00 % ±0% approx. approx. A A A A A Ω Ω Ω Order No. kg Order No. kg WG 0 WG 5 WG WG PY6 30-3A -3B -3C -3D PY6 30-4A -4B -4C -4D WG 46 WG 68 WG 00 WG PY6 30-3E -3F -3G -3H PY6 30-4E -4F -4G -4H WG 0 WG 30 WG 460 WG PY6 30-3J -3K -3L -3M PY6 30-4J -4K -4L -4M WG 000 WG 500 WG 00 WG PY6 30-3N -3P -3R -3S PY6 30-4N -4P -4R -4S Dimension drawings Resistor grid 3PY6 30 " # ) E = HA = B H 0 - # % &! #!! #! Siemens HE /57

125 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Dimension drawings Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 for setting up individually Dimensions for all units where specified in drawings. Dimension C for vertical grouping Dimension D = minimum height of clearance in air above top of box for degrees of protection Degree of Boxes grouped IP 00, IP 0, IP 0 protection vertically Type A B 3 3PS IP Individual set-up 50 3PS IP Vertical grouping 50 3PS IP PS IP PS IP A maximum of 3 resistor box- Height for setting up individually es can be grouped vertically. Resistor boxes and kits for in- Degree of H creasing the degree of protec- protection tion are supplied separately. IP IP $ Base clearance of 50 mm required. % Cable entry strip for degree of protection IP 0 and IP 3 & The hexagon bolts M x 5, nuts and spring washers required for setting up must be provided by the customer. ( Terminal box (without resistor complement) 3/58 Siemens HE. 999

126 Systemcomponents Resistor units Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 Dimension drawings Steel grid resistor units 3PS3 for vertical grouping! &! '! 0 - # # +, 0 - # & +, 3 # ) * # # & " # ", A C HA A B F H JA? JE # ) # # & " * "! &, A C HA A B F H JA? JE M EJD F H JA? JEL A I? HA A "! ' $ 0 - # $ 0 - # ' # ) # # & " * " "!, A C HA A B F H JA? JE! M EJD? L A H O B H > N I E A $ &! ' $ # & " # # # & " & % # " "!, A C HA A B F H JA? JE! M EJD JA H E = > N O B H > N I E A & 0 - # % + ), + + ) ) ) )! "!!! # ) # # & " * "! %, A C HA A B F H JA? JE M EJD? L A H Siemens HE /59

127 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Summary and applications Operational brakes which must comply with the safety and accident prevention regulations and are operated by a brake operator, are normally used on the drives of hoisting gear installations. The methods of operation of the brakes and, therefore, the methods required for the brake operators differ: On hoisting gear, the brake must engage quickly to prevent sagging of the load. On running gear, rotating gear and similar drives, gradual engaging of the brake shoes is expedient, in other words the braking force should rise slowly. These requirements are met by brake operators with motor drive and integral operating spring (brake spring) which is adjusted to the system producing the releasing force. When brake operators with integral operating spring (brake spring) are used, the spring is well protected from the effects of the environment and damage, cannot be maladjusted inadvertently and requires no particular space in the brake construction. ELDRO LL5 units are compact electro-hydraulic operators whose thrust is developed by a hydraulic pump, and the restoring force is usually produced by a compression spring. The spring can be fitted in the units with 50 and 60 mm travel. Units with 0 mm travel always require a restoring force outside the units. The operating times are relatively short and can be extended by fitting adjustable valves. The units are filled with hydraulic fluid which complies with the expected ambient temperatures. ELDRO unit, normal version Product range Standard units LL5 0 LL5 0 LL5 03 LL5 04 LL5 55 LL5 56 LL5 57 LL5 3 LL5 4 LL5 5 LL5 6 LL5 7 Special units on request Units with DC motor Order No. Type Travel mm (ED 3/5) (ED 30/5) (ED 50/6) (ED 80/6) (ED /6) (ED 0/6) (ED 30/6) (ED 50/) (ED 80/) (ED /) (ED 0/) (ED 30/) ED 85/6 ED 85/6 ED 30/5 ED 350/0 EG 50 EG 80 EG EG 0 EG On request On request On request On request On request Operating force N Operating work Ncm Applications ELDRO units are suitable for releasing brakes and for adjusting couplings, valves and flaps. The short-stroke units can be supplied with an integral operating spring, obviating the need for an external opposing force (springs or weights in the brake design). The long-stroke units always require an external opposing force. For operation in actuators, units with 50 and 00 mm travel can also be supplied. ELDRO units for special applications with 4 V V DC motor drive are available on request. ELDRO units are suitable for intermittent duty (S3-60 %) and for continuous duty (S). They can be operated at the following ambient temperatures: Normal version: 5 C to +50 C For applications in a very corrosive atmosphere and continuous high air humidity, the units can be provided with increased anti-corrosion protection. Climatic resistance Normal versions of units Climatic regions A, T to DIN 50 09, Part ; climatic group Moderate to IEC 7--. Units with increased anticorrosion protection Climatic regions H, M to DIN 50 09, Part ; climatic group General to IEC /60 Siemens HE. 999

128 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Summary and applications Approvals Type LL5 Rules and regulations ELDRO units comply with DIN VDE 0530, Part Technical description Normal versions Approved in Canada: File No. LR 6 07 Not approved but complying with regulations of the following countries Australia Austria Belgium CIS Denmark Finland France India Italy Japan Netherlands Norway Republic of South Africa Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom USA Thrust lug Piston with piston rod 3 Hydraulic pump 4 Motor 5 Mounting eye 6 Terminal box 7 Equalizing chamber 8 Hydraulic cylinder 9 Operating spring 0 Screw plug Piston rod seals Design of ELDRO LL5 0 units Design and method of operation The force acting on a piston rod and thrust lug is developed electro-hydraulically in the ELDRO unit. A hydraulic system converts the applied electrical energy to a linear, mechanical piston movement. The compact construction of the ELDRO units combines the following, arranged vertically and axially: Three-phase low-voltage motor with squirrel cage rotor Centrifugal pump Hydraulic cylinder and piston Operating spring, only in short-stroke units The housing containing the pump, hydraulic cylinder and operating spring is filled with an operating fluid. When the motor is in the off state, the piston () is at its lowest position. During operation, the fluid is pressed under the piston () by the pump impeller (3) driven by the motor (4). The direction of rotation of the motor does not affect operation because the pump impeller has radial blades. The pressure thus developed causes the piston to move against the force of the integral operating spring (9) or an opposing force acting from the exterior. When the operating spring is fitted, the difference between thrust of the hydraulic system and the spring force is available at the thrust lug () of the piston rod (). If no operating spring is fitted, the force developed by the hydraulic system is available as thrust. The travel can be restricted as desired outside the unit. When the piston stops, the power drawn by the motor drops to about 70 % on account of the hydraulic system. The force present at the thrust lug reaches its maximum value which is 5 % to 45 % above rated value, according to unit size. When the motor is in the off state, the force of the integral operating spring or of a force acting from the exterior pushes the piston back to its lowest position. If the operating spring is fitted, its force then acts on the thrust lug (). The actuating times depend on the opposing forces and utilized travel. The units need not be protected from mechanical overload. The motor is not overloaded. Siemens HE /6

129 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Technical description Operating fluid The hydraulic system of the ELDRO units is filled with an operating fluid with long-life characteristics; it is not subject to wear or contamination as long as the unit is in perfect condition. In hydraulic systems, the force is proportional to the density of the operating fluid. The fluid chosen according to a temperature range must therefore not be replaced arbitrarily by a different operating fluid. Position of the terminal box, mounting If the normal position of the Units LL5 0 and LL5 0 terminalboxisinconvenientor must be ordered accordingly obstructive for mounting an because the foot eyes are cast ELDRO unit, the entire motor onto the motor housing with housing can be offset by 90 these two unit types. with respect to foot eyes and The upper mounting eye of the the hydraulic section. These thrust lug can be rotated 360 changes are also possible on all units. later during installation of units LL5 03 to LL5 57. Increased anti-corrosion protection ELDRO units with increased coating (see page 3/70). A anti-corrosion protection have specially treated motor can a corrosion-resistant special also be installed on request. Mounting position ELDRO units may be mounted upright, horizontally or at an inclined angle on stationary or moving machine parts. During mounting, ensure that the equalizing chamber (A) of the hydraulic section always points upward. ELDRO unit Ambient temperature t u Operating fluid with agent to improve Viscosity at 0 C Pour point resistance to aging and anti-corrosion protection Version C mm /S C Normal version 5 to +50 HL 0, DIN (under 5 C: heating required in the unit) Special version 35 to +40 Special low-temperature oil 0 60 ELDRO unit Operating fluid Average volume Version Type Liters Short-stroke unit LL5 0 (Ed 3/5) LL5 0 (Ed 30/5) LL5 03 (Ed 50/6) LL5 04 (Ed 80/6) LL5 55 (Ed /6) LL5 56 (Ed 0/6) LL5 57 (Ed 30/6) Long-stroke unit LL5 3 (Ed 50/) LL5 4 (Ed 80/) LL5 5 (Ed /) LL5 6 (Ed 0/) LL5 7 (Ed 30/) The volumes of fluid are lower in versions with valves and/or springs. 3/6 Siemens HE. 999

130 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Technical description Increased anti-corrosion protection 5 AHE-5080 AHE-508 AHE-508 Thrust lug HE A K A Normal version K Terminal box rotated 90 K Foot eyes offset by 90 K Terminal box Foot eye A K HE-5083 K Equalizing chamber of the hydraulic section, positioned on the side of the rating plate or the lifting and/or lowering valve Terminal box 3 Possible positions of terminal box and mounting Mounting positions Limit switches Lifting valve, lowering valve All ELDRO units without damping spring can be equipped with mechanical limit switches or inductive proximity switches to monitor thetravelorliningwearofa double-shoe brake. The code (see page 3/70) mustbegivenontheorderto specify whether limit switches with slow-motion contact are to be fitted for monitoring the travel position (brake open/ closed) or limit switches with snap-action contact for monitoring the brake wear. All ELDRO units can be equipped with two steplessly variable valves. The lifting time is extended with the lifting valve, and the lowering time with the lowering valve. The valves can be fitted individually or jointly. The setting screw is accessible from the exterior and is alwaysonthesidewiththerating plate or at the equalizing chamber of the hydraulic section. The valves can only be fitted at the factory. HE-5086 HE-5084 Setting screw for lifting valve Setting screw for lowering valve Mechanical limit switches, not more than Arrangement of valves, plugs and setting screws HE-5085 Inductive limit switches, not more than Siemens HE /63

131 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Technical description Heating The hydraulic section of the ELDRO units must be heated at ambient temperatures below 5 C. The heating is fitted in the units as a flat tube heating element between the motor and hydraulic section, and connected to two additional terminals (70/7) in the terminal box. An additional cable entry (conduit thread) Pg 6 is used to connect the heating. The heating can be connected to 5 V or 30 V AC 50/60 Hz: Type Heat output at 30 V AC LL5 0 0 W LL5 0 All others 350 W At external temperatures of more than 5 C the heating must be switched off; at 60 C the heating time is approximately hour. The required controller, automatic turn-on circuit or temperature control are not supplied with the unit. Notes on mounting Maintenance During mounting, ensure good freedom of movement in the foot eyes and at the thrust lug. The units must not be installed under tension, the mounting bolts should not be clamped tight. Lateral forces must not act on the piston rod. The piston rod must not be damaged or contaminated by paint, otherwise the seals in the housing bushing will be destroyed. ELDRO units require no special maintenance. All bearing points in the ELDROunitaregivenaninitial application of long-life grease K-L3n to DIN 585 (for example, Shell, Alvania R 3). An ELDRO unit is adequately filled with operating fluid when the fluid reaches the edge of the filling opening (with the unit upright). Operating spring The short-stroke units with 50 and 60 mm travel can be equipped for operation in brakes with an operating spring (compression spring). The spring is fitted in the housing of the hydraulic section and adjusted to the hydraulic system so that the hydraulic force overcomes the spring force by a certain amount. This force difference is sufficient for reliable releasing of a standard brake in perfect condition. The rated forces of the operating springs are given in the technical data on page 3/68 and apply to / 3 of the rated stroke. Method of operation in standard brakes The braking force (F) pro- theidlestroke(5).thehydrauduced by the operating spring lic force (F E ) counteracts the (F c ) is transferred via the operating spring. The operat- damping spring (F d )tothe ingspringiscompressed,the brake. With the ELDRO unit off dampingspringisreleased (F E = 0) and /3 rated stroke, and the brake is disengaged. the rated force of the operat- The spring force acting on the ing spring acts on the brake. brake returns linearly to the When the ELDRO unit is valuezero.thebrakeshoes switched on, the power stroke are lifted off until the travel limit (6) is first executed and then is reached. Operating spring for actuators In actuators such as cou- whose force is adjusted to the plings, valves, separators and hydraulic system according to flaps, the actuating force must the needs of the application. usually be equal for both di- Possible solutions can be rections. For such applica- provided on request. tions, short-stoke units can be fitted with an operating spring When the ELDRO unit has been switched off (F E =0)the idle stroke (5) is first executed until the brake shoes make contact. The spring force (F c ) then begins to act on the brake, i.e. the power stroke (6). The force of the damping spring (F d ) counteracts the force of the operating spring. The resulting force appears gently and smoothly at the brake and rises linearly from zero to its full value. The operating spring and damping spring are compression types to provide the safety required in brakes. 3/64 Siemens HE. 999

132 ) Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Technical description Damping " # EI J JH= L I F HE C? D = H=? JA HEI JE?? I F HE C? D = H=? JA HEI JE? 0 - # & % Totalstroke Operatingstroke 3 Wearing reserve 4Powerstroke 5 Idle stroke Short-stroke units with integral operating spring can be additionally equipped with a damping spring. This is fitted on the piston rod instead of the thrust lug and can be retrofitted. This does not change mounting dimension A (see dimension drawings, pages 3/70 and 3/89). Since this spring is arranged between piston rod and brake lever, the operating spring and dampingspringareconnectedin series. When establishing the operating point of the brake, the compression range of the damping spring (dimension z) must be taken into H? A B JD A F A H= JE C I F HE C H? A B JD = F E C I F HE 3 Spring diagram A HE-5 HE-5089 Z Detail A Damping spring Control 0< F E F c F c > F d HE-509 Braking F c > F E =0 F c = F d HE-509 Ventilation F E > F c F c > F d =0 F E F c 4 3 HE-5093 z Compression range of the damping spring F c Force of the operating spring-(c)- F d Force of the damping spring-(d)- F E ELDRO unit force Total stroke Operating stroke 3 Wearing reserve 4 Brake lever displacement 5 Idle stroke 6 Power stroke Method of operation of the operating spring and damping spring Siemens HE /65

133 ) I I ) I I ) I I Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Technical data Time-displacement diagrams ) Short-stroke units Long-stroke units, EI F =? A A J 5 M EJ? D 5 M EJ? D BB #! " I $ " I $ 6 E A J 6 E A J 0 - # ' ", EI F =? A A J 5 M EJ? D 5 M EJ? D BB ) 0 - # ' % ' #! & # " % #! $ # " # "! " $ & I " $ I & 6 E A J 6 E A J LL5 0(ED 3), LL5 0 (ED 30) LL5 3 (ED 50/), LL5 4 (ED 80/), EI F =? A A J 5 M EJ? D 5 M EJ? D BB $ "! # " #! #! # " " I $ " I $ 6 E A J 6 E A J 0 - # ' #, EI F =? A A J 5 M EJ? D 5 M EJ? D BB ) 0 - # ' & ' # % & # # % # $ # % $ # " # #! " $ & I " $ I & 6 E A J 6 E A J LL5 03 (ED 50), LL5 04 (ED 80) LL5 5 (ED /), LL5 6 (ED 0/), LL5 7 (ED 30/), EI F =? A A J 5 M EJ? D 5 M EJ? D BB $ "! # # # # # # # # % # # $ # # $ # # % " I $ " I $ 6 E A J 6 E A J 0 - # ' $, EI F =? A A J 5 M EJ? D 5 M EJ? D BB ) 0 - # ' ' ' & % $ # "! " $ & I " $ I & 6 E A J 6 E A J LL5 55 (ED ), LL5 56 (ED 0), LL5 57 (ED 30) LL5 33 (ED 630/) )Atunittemperatureof0 Cwithweightloading 3/66 Siemens HE. 999

134 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Technical data Time-displacement diagrams for short-stroke units The characteristics apply to spring (c-spring) and for use units with integral operating as brake operators. LL5 0 (ED 3) LL5 03 (ED 50) LL5 55 (ED ) 3 LL5 0 (ED 30) LL5 04 (ED 80) LL5 56 (ED 0) Force of the hydraulic system needed to tension the operating spring Force exerted by the operating spring (braking force) LL5 57 (ED 30) Siemens HE /67

135 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Technical data Unit version Short-stroke units Long-stroke units Type LL Rated stroke 50 mm 60 mm 0 mm Lift ) Ncm Force of the hydraulic system ) N Spring force of the operating spring in brakes for start of stroke for / 3 stroke N N for end of stroke N Spring constant N/cm Lifting/lowering time (with rated stroke and T u =0 C) (For times without Lifting times: valve, see time-dis- without valve placement dia- with valve open grams, page 3/66) with valve closed s s s Lowering times: without valve with valve open with valve closed s s s Max. switching frequency in S3-60 % for normal units Cycles/h Operating voltage for normal units AC 50 Hz 30/400 V, 400/690 V and 90/500 V ±5 % (When delivered, motor windings are star-connected for 400 V or 500 V or 690 V *.) Special operating voltage AC 50 and 60 Hz 5 to 690 V for normal units Terminal box Terminal screw, conductor M4 Terminal screw, PE cond. Ground screw, external M4 M5 Conductor crosssection Cable entry 4x.5mm Pg (conduit thread) Power consumption referred to end W of stroke cycle and with unit in cold state Rated current at 400 V AC 50 Hz A Degree of protection for normal units for entire unit IP 65 (DIN ) Coating Normal coating Color Special coating for increased anti-corrosion protection: Paint finish Umbra grey, RAL 70 Modified alkyde resin Umbra grey, RAL 70 x zinc phosphate and x polyurethane coating (DD paint) ) These data apply to 50 Hz and 60 Hz line frequency. 3/68 Siemens HE. 999

136 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Technical data Limit switches Inductive limit switch in normal version Mechanical limit switch in normal version from LL5 0 for LL5 0 from LL5 0 Type (made by Schmersal) IFL A MV8H330y T4VH 335z MH 44yK, PG 6 TH44yK, PG 6 Switching system Spring contact Slow-motion Spring contact Slow-motion contact contact Rated operating voltage AC/DC 550 V AC 4060 Hz AC 4060 Hz AC 4060 Hz Rated operating current I e /AC.5 A max. 4 A max. (30 V) 4 A max. (400 V) Output current I e 300 ma max. Residual current Approx. 0.3 ma (4 V) Approx. 0.5 ma (30 V) Voltage drop Approx. 4 V (300 ma) Contact rating 5 ma min. Rated operating distance 5 mm Switching elements NO NO + NC NO + NC NO + NC Permissible ambient temperature 5 C to +70 C Conductor cross-section x.5 mm max. Cable entry Pg 3.5 Pg 3.5 Pg 3.5 Pg 6 Degree of protection IP 67 IP 65 IP 67 IP 65 NO: normally open NC: normally closed 3 Selecting and ordering data Lift Stroke Force of Force of the ELDRO-Type Normal version Weight with oil filling the operating (operating fluid HL0) for hydraulic spring for normal version system / 3 stroke Ncm mm N N Order No. approx. kg Short-stroke units Ed 3/5 LL5 0@ Ed 30/5 LL5 0@ Ed 50/6 LL5 03@ Ed 80/6 LL5 04@ Ed /6 LL5 55@ Ed 0/6 LL5 56@ Ed 30/6 LL5 57@ 39 Long-stroke units Ed 50/ LL5 3@ Ed 80/ LL5 4@ Ed / LL5 5@ Ed 0/ LL5 6@ Ed 30/ LL5 7@ 40 Operating voltages AC 50 Hz 30/*400 V AC 50 Hz 90/*500 V AC 50 Hz 400/*690 V AC 50 Hz for other operating voltages from 5 to 690 V Specify on the order: Order No. and code H0Y Desired operating voltage AC 60 Hz for operating voltages from 5 to 690 V Specify on the order: Order No. and code HY Desired operating voltage Siemens HE /69

137 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Selecting and ordering data Special versions Specify on the order: Order No. with suffix -Z and additional code L.. (Two or more codes can be quoted additively and in any order.) At extra cost G No extra cost Version not possible For normal version LL5 0 0 LL LL LL LL LL Operating fluid, low-temperature oil L0 CSA version L Stator with increased anti-corrosion protection ) Corrosion-resistant coating Coating in special color to RAL L5 L6 L7 Seals made of Viton L8 Operating spring L30 Damping spring (only with operating spring) ) L3 Lifting valve fitted Lowering valve fitted L34 L35 Foot eyes offset by 90 from terminal box G G G L43 Foot plate (replacement for LL5 08) Anti-condensation heating for T u <5 C L45 L46 Mounting fixture for all limit switches L5 Limit switches (without mounting): Mech. limit switch MV 8H-330- y with snap contact for monitoring brake wear Mech. limit switch T4VH 335- z with slow-motion contact for monitoring travel (brake open/closed) Inductive limit switch IFL A Mech. limit switch MH 44- yk, PG 6 with snap contact for monitoring brake wear Mech. limit switch TH 44- yk, PG 6 with slow-motion contact for monitoring travel (brake open/closed) Code L53 L60 L54 L55 L6 ) On request ) Combination of L3 and L55 is not possible. 3/70 Siemens HE. 999

138 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Dimension drawings ELDRO units, normal version (LL5 0 to LL5 04, LL5 3 and LL5 4) 3 LL5 0 to LL5 04, LL5 3 and LL5 4 Type A B C D E E F G H K L M N O P b 5 LL LL LL ) 8 LL ) 3 3 LL ) LL ) ø55 A 00 C b HE HE-50 E F Damping spring for LL5 0 to LL5 04 LL5 0, version with foot plate as replacement for older type ED c ) 4 mm diameter damping spring for LL5 0 to LL5 04 Siemens HE /7

139 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Dimension drawings ELDRO units, normal version (LL5 0 to LL5 04, LL5 3 and LL5 4) Limit switches for LL5 0 Limit switches for LL5 0 Limit switches for LL5 03 and LL5 04 Limit switches for LL5 3 and LL5 4 3/7 Siemens HE. 999

140 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Dimension drawings ELDRO units, normal version (LL5 5 to LL5 7, LL5 55 to LL5 57) Type A B W LL5 55 LL5 56 LL LL5 5 LL5 6 LL A, A HE , Damping spring for LL5 55 to LL5 57 Siemens HE /73

141 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Dimension drawings ELDRO units, normal version (LL5 5 to LL5 7, LL5 55 to LL5 57) Limit switches for LL5 55 to LL5 57 Limit switches for LL5 5 to LL5 7 3/74 Siemens HE. 999

142 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 0 normal version Item No Description Thrust lug Tension bush Eg 6/, x 0 Cover Wiper AS 6--3/4-BSK 3070 Shaft sealing ring BA NBR/90 Piston, complete Part No. E E E 3.U 6 7 Lifting valve, complete Lowering valve, complete Lifting and lowering valve, complete 0 Operating spring Side plate Cylinder 7 3 Seal 7 4 O-ring 7- F 75 5 Intermediate flange E 3.U 7 E 3.U 73 E 3.U 74 E 3. E 3.87 E 3.97 E E Seal Stator with winding Rotor, complete 9 Deep-groove ball bearing 600-RS 7 0 Terminal box seal Terminal box cover Motor housing Motor housing with offset foot eyes 4 Terminal board KB 744 S/KL 9/ 5 Cable gland Threaded pin M 0 x 8 DIN 96 7 Retaining ring 3 x. DIN 47 8 Spacer SS 5 x x.5 9 Retaining ring 5 x DIN Shaft sealing ring BABSL, NBR/ Piston guide band Impeller, 50 Hz Impeller, 60 Hz 34 Featherkey A 3 x 3 x 0 DIN Hexagon nut M 6 SSN Adjusting parts for valves 37 SealingringAx7DIN Screw plug M x.5 DIN DU bush 60 DU 40 Housing without bores for valves Housing with bore for lifting valve Housing with bore for lowering valve Housing with bores for lifting and lowering valve E 3.5 E 3.07 E 3.U 4 0 E 80.3 E 3.3 E 3.75 E E E 3.88 E E 3.U E 3.0 E 3.0 E 3.03 E Disc for lifting and lowering valve Blanking plug Pg -06 for valve bore Sealing ring A8 x DIN 7603 for valve bore E Motor housing E Foot plate with eyes Hexagon screw M x 0 DIN 933 Spring washer A 6 DIN 8 E Damping spring, complete Retainer Hexagon screw M 0 x 0 DIN 93 E 3.U 40 E Cup spring Damping spring Yoke E 50.9 E 3.90 E Tension bush Eg 6/, x 0 Thrust lug Tension bush Eg 0/6 x 0 03 E 3.93 Oil volume.6 l Standard DIN parts can be procured commercially. 7 Wearing parts See page 3/88 for list of wearing parts. Siemens HE /75

143 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 0 normal version 3/76 Siemens HE. 999

144 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 0 normal version Item Description Part No. No. 3 Thrust lug Retaining ring 30 x. DIN 47 Ring E E Adapter ring PS 0 x 8 x DIN 988 Felt ring Fi 6 x 8 x 4 Guide bush 60 DU Screw plug M 4 x.5 DIN 90 SealingringA4x8DIN7603 Operating spring 05 4 E Operating spring Spring retainer Guide ring for units without valves E 30. E 30.5/ E 30.63/ Cord ring O 07- F75 ShaftsealingringBABSL, NBR/90 Retaining ring 5 x DIN Spacer SS 5 x x.5 DIN 988 Deep-groove ball bearing 630-RS DIN 65 Retaining ring 4 x.75 DIN Motor housing Motor housing, foot eyes offset by 90 Stator with winding E E E Deep-groove ball bearing 60-RS DIN 65 Stator, complete Threaded pin 0 x 8 DIN E 30.U Cable gland Pg Terminal board Terminal box cover E Terminal box seal Seal Intermediate flange E 80.3 E 30.5 E Seal Impeller, 50 Hz Impeller, 60 Hz E 30.8 E E Featherkey A 3 x 3 x 6 DIN 6885 Hexagon nut M 8SSN 00-8 Housing without valve bores E Piston, complete Shaft sealing ring BA SealingringAx7DIN7603 E 30.U Screw plug M x.5 DIN 90 Shaft sealing ring BASL NBR/90 Wiper, complete Housing with bore for lifting valve Housing with bore for lowering valve Housing with bore for lifting and lowering valve E E E Valve insert for lifting valve Valve insert for lowering valve Valve insert for lifting and lowering valve E 30.04/ E 30.4/ E 30.40/ Valve spring for lifting and lowering valve Valve plate for lifting and lowering valve Guide wheel, complete, for lifting and lowering valve E 30. E 30. E 30.U Adjusting parts for valves Retainer Cup spring E 30.U 7 E E Hexagon screw M 0 x 0 DIN 93 Damping spring Yoke Thrust lug 0 E E 30.9 E Oil volume.6 l Standard DIN parts can be procured commercially. 7 Wearing parts See page 3/88 for list of wearing parts. 3 Siemens HE /77

145 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 03, LL5 3 normal version 3/78 Siemens HE. 999

146 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 03, LL5 3 normal version Item No. Description for LL5 03 Part No. for LL5 3 Part No. 3 Thrust lug Retaining ring 35 x.5 DIN 47 Ring E E Adapter ring PS x 3 x DIN 98 Felt ring Fi 0 x 3 x 4 DU bush 0 x 3 x 30 KS Screw plug M 4 x.5 DIN 90 SealingringA4x8DIN7603 Operating spring 05 4 E Spring retainer Guide ring for units without valves E 80.5 E E Cord ring O F Shaft sealing ring BABSL, NBR/90 Retaining ring 5 x DIN 47 Spacer SS 5 x x Deep-groove ball bearing 630-RS DIN 65 Retaining ring 4 x.75 DIN 47 Motor housing E E Foot plate Stator with winding ) Tension bush Eg 4/0 x 30 Rotor, complete E 80.U 0 E E 50.U 70 E 80.U 0 E E50.U Threaded pin M 0 x 8 DIN 96 Cable gland Pg Terminal board Terminal box cover Terminal box seal 303 E 80.3 E E80.3 E Seal Intermediate flange Seal E 80.5 E 80.9 E 80.0 E80.5 E80.9 E Impeller, 50 Hz Impeller, 60 Hz Featherkey A 3 x 3 x 6 DIN 6885 E E E50.06 E Hexagon nut M 8 SSN 00-8 Housing for units without valves Piston, complete 08 E E 80.U E E80.U Shaft sealing ring BA NBR/90 SealingringAx7DIN Screw plug M x.5 DIN 90 Shaft sealing ring BASL 0-3-7/8 7 NBR/90 Wiper, complete Housing for units with lifting valve Housing for units with lowering valve Housing for units with lifting and lowering valve E E E E E E Valve insert for lifting valve Valve insert for lowering valve Valve insert for lifting and lowering valve E E 80.4 E E80.04 E80.4 E Valve spring for fitted valve Valve plate for fitted valve E 80. E 80. E80. E Guide wheel, complete, for fitted valve E 80.U E 80.U 59 Adjusting parts for valves E 80.U 7 E 80.U Retainer Cup spring E E Hexagon screw M 0 x 0 DIN 93 Damping spring Yoke Thrust lug 03 E E 50.9 E Oil volume for unit LL5 03: 4. l LL5 3: 5.5 l Standard DIN parts can be procured commercially. ) Operating voltage and frequency must additionally be specified on the order. 7 Wearing parts See page 3/88 for list of wearing parts. 3 Siemens HE /79

147 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 04, LL5 4 normal version 3/80 Siemens HE. 999

148 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 04, LL5 4 normal version Item No. Description for LL5 04 Part No. for LL5 4 Part No. 3 Thrust lug Retaining ring 35 x.5 DIN 47 Ring E E Adapter ring PS x 3 x DIN 988 Felt ring Fi 0 x 3 x 4 DU bush 0 x 3 x 30 KS Screw plug M 4 x.5 DIN 90 SealingringA4x8DIN Operating spring Operating spring Spring retainer E 50. E 80. E Guide ring for units without valves Cord ring O F 75 Shaft sealing ring BABSL, NBR/90 E E Retaining ring 5 x DIN 74 Spacer SS 5 x x.5 Deep-groove ball bearing 630-RS DIN Retaining ring 4 x.75 DIN 47 Motor housing Foot plate 74 E E 80.U 0 74 E80.45 E 80.U 0 3 Stator with winding Tension bush Eg 4/0 x 30 Rotor, complete E E 80.U 70 E E80.U Threaded pin M 0 x 8 DIN 96 Cable gland Pg Terminal board Terminal box cover Terminal box seal E 80.3 E 80.3 E80.3 E Seal Intermediate flange E 80.5 E 80.9 E80.5 E Seal Impeller, 50 Hz Impeller, 60 Hz E 80.0 E E E80.0 E80.05 E Featherkey A 3 x 3 x 6 DIN 6885 Hexagon nut M 8 SSN 00-8 Housing for units without valves E E Piston, complete Shaft sealing ring BA NBR/90 SealingringAx7DIN7603 E 80.U E80.U Screw plug M x.5 DIN 90 Shaft sealing ring BASL 0-3-7/8 7 NBR/90 Wiper, complete Housing for units with lifting valve Housing for units with lowering valve Housing for units with lifting and lowering valve E E E E E E Valve insert for lifting valve Valve insert for lowering valve Valve insert for lifting and lowering valve E E 80.4 E E80.04 E80.4 E Valve spring Valve plate E 80. E 80. E80. E Guide wheel, complete Adjusting parts for valves E 80.U E 80.U 7 E80.U E80.U Retainer Cup spring Hexagon screw M 0 x 0 DIN 93 E E Damping spring Yoke Thrust lug E E 50.9 E Oil volume for unit LL5 04: 4. l LL5 4: 5.5 l Standard DIN parts can be procured commercially. 7 Wearing parts See page 3/88 for list of wearing parts. 3 Siemens HE /8

149 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 55, LL5 5 normal version 3/8 Siemens HE. 999

150 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 55, LL5 5 normal version Item No. Description for LL5 55 Part No. for LL5 5 Part No. 3 4 Thrust lug, complete Clamping pin 5 x 40 Spring ring SB 45 E 50.U E50.U Wiper 3 x 45 x 7 x 0 Shaft sealing ring BA 3 x 45 x 7 7 NBR/90 Felt ring 3 x 4 x M 5 DIN DU bush 340 DU Bearing bush, complete Operating spring 87 E.U 5 E.4 87 E.U Cylinder Housing Intermediate flange E.08 E.0 E.0 E85.0 E.5 E Hexagon nut M 8 SSN 00-8 SW 4 Featherkey A 3 x 3 x 6 DIN O-ring 30 x.5 B DIN 3770 NB 70 Shaft sealing ring BABSL NBR/ Retaining ring 5 x DIN 47 Spacer SS 5 x x.5 Deep-groove ball bearing 630-RS DIN Retaining ring 4 x.75 DIN 47 Motor housing Stator with winding 39 E E E80.45 E Rotor, complete Foot plate, complete Tension bush E 80.U 70 E.U 0 08 E80.U70 E.U Threaded pin Terminal board Cable gland Terminal box cover Cylinder screw Terminal box seal Seal Clamping pin 6 x 8 DIN 48 Side plate E 80.3 E E 80.3 E E E80.3 E E80.3 E E Impeller, 50 Hz Impeller, 60 Hz Seal E E E.44 E80.05 E50.06 E Guide ring for units without valves Clamping pin 4 x 45 DIN 48 Disc E E.4 E E Piston guide band Piston, complete Piston E.07 E.U 3 E.06 E.07 E.U4 E Clamping pin 3 x 60 DIN 48 Piston rod 86 E.8 86 E Screw plug M x.5 DIN 90 SealingringAx7DIN7603 Spring ring Baffle plate Roundsealingring70x3BDIN3770NB70 Cylinder screw AM 4 x 60 DIN E Valve insert for lifting valve Valve insert for lowering valve Valve insert for lifting and lowering valve E.3 E. E.4 E.3 E. E Valve spring Valve plate Guide wheel, complete E 80. E 80. E 80.U E80. E80. E80.U 68 7 Intermediate flange for units with lifting valve Intermediate flange for units with lowering valve Intermediate flange for units with lifting and lowering valve Adjusting parts for valves E.03 E.04 E.05 E.U 4 E.03 E.04 E.05 E.U Clamping pin 4 x 4 DIN 48 CastellatednutM6x.5DIN935 Cup spring Stud bolt Damping spring Yoke Thrust lug, complete E 5.9 E 5.94 E 5.90 E 5.9 E 50.U 4 Oil volume 9.4 l Standard DIN parts can be procured commercially. 7 Wearing parts See page 3/88 for list of wearing parts. 3 Siemens HE /83

151 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 56, LL5 6 normal version 3/84 Siemens HE. 999

152 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 56, LL5 6 normal version Item No. Description for LL5 56 Part No. for LL5 6 Part No. 3 4 Thrust lug, complete Clamping pin 5 x 40 DIN 48 Spring ring SB 45 E 50.U E50.U Wiper 3 x 45 x 7 x 0 Shaft sealing ring BA 3 x 45 x 7 7 NBR/90 Felt ring 3 x 4 x M 5 DIN DU bush 340 DU Bearing bush, complete 87 E.U 5 87 E.U6 3 4 Operating spring Operating spring E 0. E Cylinder Housing Intermediate flange E.08 E.0 E.0 E85.0 E.5 E Hexagon nut M 8 SSN 00-8 SW 4 Featherkey A 3 x 3 x 6 DIN O-ring 30 x.5 B DIN 3770 NB Shaft sealing ring BABSL NBR/90 Retaining ring 5 x DIN 47 Spacer SS 5 x x Deep-groove ball bearing 630-RS DIN 65 Retaining ring 4 x.75 DIN 47 Motor housing E E Stator with winding Rotor, complete Foot plate, complete E E 80.U 70 E.U 0 E E80.U70 E.U Tension bush Eg 30/5 x 5 Threaded pin M 0 x 8 DIN 96 Terminal board Cable gland Terminal box cover Cylinder screw 44 E 80.3 E E80.3 E Terminal box seal Seal Clamping pin 6 x 8 DIN 48 E 80.3 E E80.3 E Side plate Impeller, 50 Hz Impeller, 60 Hz E E E E80.47 E80.06 E Seal Guide ring for units without valves E.44 E E.44 E Clamping pin 4 x 45 DIN 48 Disc 83 E.4 83 E Piston guide band Piston, complete Piston (without rod and guide band) E.07 E.U 3 E.06 E.07 E.U4 E Clamping pin 3 x 60 DIN 48 Piston rod 86 E.8 86 E Screw plug M x.5 DIN 90 SealingringAx7DIN7603 Spring ring SB Baffle plate Roundsealingring70x3BDIN3770NB70 Cylinder screw AM 4 x 60 DIN E Valve insert for lifting valve Valve insert for lowering valve Valve insert for lifting and lowering valve E.3 E. E.4 E.3 E. E Valve spring Valve plate Guide wheel, complete E 80. E 80. E 80.U E80. E80. E80.U 68 7 Intermediate flange for lifting valve Intermediate flange for lowering valve Intermediate flange for lifting and lowering valve Adjusting parts for valves E.03 E.04 E.05 E.U 4 E.03 E.04 E.05 E.U Clamping pin 4 x 4 DIN 48 CastellatednutM6x.5DIN935 Cup spring E Stud bolt Damping spring Yoke Thrust lug, complete E 5.94 E E 5.9 E 50.U 4 Oil volume 9.4 l Standard DIN parts can be procured commercially. 7 Wearing parts See page 3/88 for list of wearing parts. 3 Siemens HE /85

153 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 57, LL5 7 normal version 3/86 Siemens HE. 999

154 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 57, LL5 7 normal version Item No. Description for LL5 57 Part No. for LL5 7 Part No. 3 4 Thrust lug, complete Clamping pin 5 x 40 DIN 48 Spring ring SB 45 E 50.U E50.U Wiper 3 x 45 x 7 x0 Shaft sealing ring BA 3 x 45 x 7 7 NBR/90 Felt ring 3 x 4 x M 5 DIN DU bush 340 DU Bearing bush Operating spring 87 E.U 5 E E.U Operating spring Cylinder Housing for units without valves E.4 E 30. E.0 - E30. E Guide ring Hexagon nut M 8 SSN 00-8 SW 4 Clamping pin 4 x 30 DIN 48 E E Clamping pin 4 x 45 DIN 48 Featherkey A 3 x 3 x 6 DIN 6885 Intermediate flange E E Shaft sealing ring BABSL FKM/575 Retaining ring 5 x DIN 47 Spacer Deep-groove ball bearing 630-RS DIN 65 Retaining ring 4 x.75 DIN 47 Motor housing E E Stator with winding Rotor, complete Foot plate, complete E E 30.U 4 E.U 0 E E30.U4 E.U Tension bush Eg 30/5 x 5 Threaded pin M 0 x 8 DIN 96 Terminal board Cable gland Terminal box cover Cylinder screw 44 E 80.3 E E80.3 E Terminal box seal Seal Spacer S x 7 x.5 DIN 988 E 80.3 E E80.3 E Clamping pin 6 x 8 DIN 48 Side plate Bush 85 E E E80.47 E Seal Guide ring Round sealing ring 30 x.5 B DIN 3770 NB 70 E.44 E E.44 E 3ß Impeller, 50 Hz Impeller, 60 Hz E E 30.0 E30.07 E Round sealing ring 78 x B DIN 3770 NB 70 Disc Piston guide band 57 E.4 E E.4 E Piston, complete Piston (without rod and guide band) Clamping pin 3 x 60 DIN 48 E.U 3 E E.U4 E Piston rod SealingringAx7DIN7603 Screw plug M x.5 DIN 90 E E Spring ring SB 80 Baffle plate Roundsealingring70x3BDIN3770NB E Housing with bore for lifting valve Housing with bore for lowering valve Housing with bore for lifting and lowering valve E 30.0 E 30.0 E E30.6 E30.7 E30.8 Standard DIN parts can be procured commercially. 7 Wearing parts See page 3/88 for list of wearing parts. 3 Siemens HE /87

155 Systemcomponents ELDRO brake operators Sectional diagrams and parts list LL5 57, LL5 7 normal version Item No. Description for LL5 57 Part No. for LL5 7 Part No Cylinder screw AM 4 x 35 DIN 84 Valve spring Valve plate 79 E 80. E E80. E Guide wheel, complete Clamping pin 4 x 45 DIN 48 Adjusting parts for valves E 80.U 83 E.U 4 E80.U 83 E.U4 90 Clamping pin 4 x 4 DIN CastellatednutM6x.5DIN Cup spring E Stud bolt E Damping spring E Damping spring E Yoke Thrust lug, complete E 5.9 E 50.U 4 - Oil volume 9. l Standard DIN parts can be procured commercially. 7 Wearing parts See page 3/88 for list of wearing parts. Spare parts List of wearing parts for units in normal version For ELDRO unit Order No. Type LL5 0 Ed 3/5 40 LL5 0 Ed 30/ 4 LL5 03 Ed 50/6 43 LL5 04 Ed 80/6 44 LL5 55 Ed /6 47 LL5 56 Ed 0/6 48 LL5 57 Ed 30/6 49 LL5 3 Ed 50/ 43 LL5 4 Ed 80/ 44 LL5 5 Ed / 47 LL5 6 Ed 0/ 48 LL5 7 Ed 30/ 49 3/88 Siemens HE. 999

156 Switchgear and control equipment 4/ Master controllers, differential limit switches 4/ Summary 4/ Double master controller 3SJ3 4/ Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 4/7 Crane controllers 4/7 Summary 4/8 Rotatable crane controller 3SJ9 30 4/4 Contactors for hoisting gear equipment 4/4 Summary 4/4 General 4/43 Selection recommendations 4/44 Selection recommendations for special operating conditions 4/49 SIMOMAT K control monitors, 6GA4 65 4/49 Description 4/5 Technical data 4/5 Selecting and ordering data 4/53 Examples of connection 4/54 Dimension drawings Siemens HE /

157 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Summary The drive motors of hoisting gear installations are controlled by cam controllers (master controllers) via contactors. Control devices with a largely bounce-free switching action are a prerequisite for proper functioning of contactor control. This requirement is met by the switchgear in the following. The double master controllers are easy and reliable to operate. They have switching elements actuated by cam discs. The switching elements are available in two versions: With gold-plated switching contacts for reliably switching low voltages and currents as well as currents of up to A and voltages of up to 50 V at AC-5 With silver contacts for currents of up to 4 A at AC-5 50 V. Easily sensed detent positions and a particularly emphasized zero detent allow reliable switching, even in forceful operation. Double master controller 3SJ3 Built-in switch for one or two directions of movement for crane controllers Switching elements with gold-plated contacts, suitable for electronics Choice of switching elements with silver contacts for currents of up to 4 A at AC-5 50 V Pushbutton and latch function in the switching lever Analog setpoint generators can be fitted Opto-electronic encoders (digital master controller) can be fitted Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 Rugged cam-operated switch in a cast housing For grab cranes with single-lever grab control Actuation of the differential limit switch by the closing and holding winch Double master controller 3SJ3 3SJ3 with grip 3SJ3 with ball 3SJ3 with pushbutton in the ball Applications Mounting Double master controllers 3SJ3 are intended for building-in in degree of protection IP 00. They are suitable for fitting in: Crane control gear, control stands and control pedestals Stationary and portable consoles Remote and floor-control units The controllers are suitable for switching auxiliary circuits of up to 50 V at AC-5. The double contact principle and gold-plated switching contacts also ensure reliable switching at low voltages in electronic circuits. The duplex master controller is screwed on to the upper cover plate of the mounting space from the exterior with four screws. The plate on which the controller is secured should have a thickness of to not more than 4 mm. The mounting opening is sealed with a bellows. This has a molded seal at the bottom fold which is clamped between the cover and the housing. The bellows is made of highly flexible neoprene and resists oil, acids, caustic solutions, sea water, ozone and UV radiation. 4/ Siemens HE. 999

158 3 3 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Drive block The drive block has a switching lever and an internal articulated-shaft mechanism, with which two drive axles can be actuated independently, separately or jointly. The drive axles are offset by 90. Each drive axle can be actuated from each switching position of the other axle. The switches for surface mounting on the side are driven via gear segments and spur gears; the switch fitted to the base is driven via bevel gears. At the drive block, surface mounting switches can be fitted to one or both mounting surfaces of each drive axle. A surface mounting switch can also be fitted to the base on which one of the two drive axles acts. However, not more than 4 switching elements may be arranged on one drive axle. The number of mounting surfaces which can be occupied by switches is reduced if spring return devices are used or a surface mounting switch is to be fitted to the base. The detent disc is part of the surface mounting switch and has an emphasized zero detent. The drive block is available in two different versions: Normal version for a service life of 0 million switching operations Ruggedized version for a service life of 0 million switching operations. Switching lever A grip or ball is fitted to the switching lever as the actuating element. Grey grip without momentary-action function with pushbutton with latch for zero position locking with latch as pushbutton. Black ball without momentary-action function with pushbutton with dead man pushbutton (mechanical by keeping the upper half of the grip pressed down, or capacitive by resting the hand on it) with signal switch (by raising the lower half of the grip) with mechanical zero position locking (by raising the lower half of the grip). The grey grip can be rotated 90 to each side after slackening a nut. A pushrod positioned within the switching lever actuates a microswitch situated in the interior of the drive block. To allow the microswitch to be actuated from each switching position, the pushrod has a ball segment at the lower end. The zero position locking is also actuated via the pushrod. The switching rod travels largely wear-free in a gate with two guide rolls. The lever excursion is restricted to 40 on each side. The stop plate can be replaced or exchanged for a special switching gate. Double lever-operated mechanism For special applications N O N 4 HE Surface mounting switch for 3SJ3 Cam disc for 3SJ3 Surface mounting switch of a 3SJ3 with wire-wound potentiometer with detent Surface mounted switch The surface mounted switch is assembled from switching elements, each with two contact elements, which are snap-fitted on a support. The switching elements have special double contact elements of high reliability and are available in two versions: For currents A as standard version (grey color). These switching elements have gold-plated contacts and can also reliably switch low currents in the ma region at low voltages. They are therefore also suitable for use in electronic circuits. For currents up to 4 A (yellow color). These switching elements with silver contacts should be used for switching currents of > A (such as contactors of other manufacturers). The control state indicators on the switching elements indicate the control state of the individual contacts. Assemblies of, 4, 6, 8, 0 and contacts can be created. The conductor terminals use the SIGUT connection system and have the following technical advantages: - Captive screws - Funnel-shaped conductor and screwdriver guides - Safe from touch by finger and back of hand to DIN VDE 006 Part 00. Siemens HE /3

159 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Cam disc A cam disc is assigned to each contact element. The cam discs are clamped onto the camshaft with cup springs. After removal of the double switching element, they can easily be replaced with a wire hook supplied with each switch. The detent element is fitted to the side opposite to the drive side. The detent disc allows up to switching positions and has recesses to emphasize the zero detent which can thus be clearly distinguished from the switching positions. The detent spring can be replaced and is available in three strengths so that the detent can be adapted to the operational requirements. The cam discs are marked on onesidewith N fornonoverlapping contacting and on the other side with U for overlapping contacting. With the programs cut at the factory, the N marking always points to the drive side. The cam discs have markings allowing the switching program to be cut with a fine saw and file. The cam discs must be seated on the switching shaft in such as way that the same marking is always seen in the viewing direction. Spring return Fitting of potentiometers or digital encoders Friction brake Spring returns can be fitted to On variable-speed drives, Opto-electronic encoder A mechanical friction brake the opposite mounting surface of the switch for auto-return of potentiometers or digital encoders are used to preset the (OEE) 6GA4 603-@AA00 with linear characteristic can be installed to achieve greater friction force. The the switching lever to the zero setpoint. For this purpose, the Wire-wound potentiometer detents for the zero position, position. following devices can be fitted 6KA9 94-@ with linear or control range end or field The spring return is assem- on the detent side of the sur- nonlinear characteristic. weakening are then machined bled on a baseplate and face mounting switch without into the brake disc. comprises two levers and one intermediate gearing, with Direct installation without compression spring. When the maximum resolution of the intermediate gearing results in switching lever is operated, angle of rotation: no backlash or hysteresis in actuation. the spring is tensioned by the roll lever. The spring return is available as a single part and can be retrofitted. 4/4 Siemens HE. 999

160 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Technical data A contact Gold-plated contacts, for electronics 4 A contact Silver contacts Normal Version Ruggedized Version Normal Version Ruggedized Version Type 3SJ3 0 3SJ3 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 6 Double master controller 3SJ3 RatedinsulationvoltageV i AC V DC V Test Voltage kv Rated VoltageV in AC V Rated Operating Current I in /AC-, DC-, AC-5, DC-3 at - AC 50 V A DC 4 V A - DC 48 V A Short-circuit Protection (without welding effect) - DIAZED fuses, operating class gl A Circuit breakers with G characteristic A Mechanical Life 0 x x x x 0 6 Maximum Switching Frequency Cycles/h 000 Conductor Cross-sections - stranded with ferrules mm x0.5to.5 - solid mm xto.5 Pushbuttonintheswitchinglever Rated Voltage V in V 50 Rated Current I in /AC-5 at 50 V A Life of the microswitch ( changeover contact) Cycles 0 x 0 6 Permissible ambient temperature - Operation C 0to+60 40to+60 0to+60 40to+60 - Storage C 50to+80 50to+80 50to+80 50to+80 Climatic resistance Damp heat constant DIN IEC 68 Part -3 Damp heat cyclic DIN IEC 68 Part -30 Damp heat constant DIN IEC 68 Part -3 Damp heat cyclic DIN IEC 68 Part -30 Damp heat constant DIN IEC 68 Part -3 Damp heat cyclic DIN IEC 68 Part -30 Damp heat constant DIN IEC 68 Part -3 Damp heat cyclic DIN IEC 68 Part -30 Creepage distances and clearances to IEC 947-; Overvoltage category III, pollution severity 3 Regulations IEC EN DIN VDE Approvals CSA-LR 883-5M Degree of protection to IEC 59 DIN IP Siemens HE /5

161 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Technical data Opto-electronic encoder 6GA4 603 (for digital setpoints) ) The opto-electronic encoder (OEE) forms a digital master controller when it is assembled together with two switching elements (four contacts) of a master controller 3SJ3. Of these four contacts, one contact serves for monitoring the zero position, and two contacts serve for presetting the direction. The OEE must be supplied with 4 V DC either from the controller or from a separate power supply unit. A 5-core connecting cable with DA 5 male connector at one end is required for connecting the OEE to a terminal strip or ET 00/ET 00. See page 4/7 for connector assignments. 6-bit encoder 8-bit encoder (standard version) Order No. 6GA4 603-AA00 6GA4 603-AA00 Type OEC-4- OEC-- Encoding Binary Binary Characteristic Linear Linear Power supply DCV 0to30 0to30 Current consumption ma Output 4 V DC, 5 ma 4 V DC, 5 ma (push-pull output stage) Temperature range C 0 to to +60 Service life Hours of operation Connection Female sub D connector DA5 with strain relief Female sub D connector DA5 with strain relief Degree of protection IP 54 IP 54 Weight g Approx. 350 Approx. 350 Connecting cable Order No. 3SX4 75 with DA 5 male connector,.5 m long, approx. 00 g Output characteristic of the opto-electronic encoder for digital master controllers ) Encoder of type OEC 4 with PROFIBUS or CAN bus connection on request. 4/6 Siemens HE. 999

162 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Technical data Opto-electronic encoder 6GA4 603 (for digital setpoints) Pin assignments for the opto-electronic encoder Siemens HE /7

163 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Technical data Opto-electronic encoder 6GA4 603 (for analog setpoints) The following opto-electronic encoders (OEE) are available as replacements for the magnetoresistive potentiometer 6KA9 0-3B: Encoder 6DA AA0 (type OEC -3--) with ±0 V output Encoder 6DA AA0 (type OEC -3--6) with ±0 ma output Caution: the encoders can only be fitted onto master controllers 3SJ3. A 5-core cable with DA 5 plug at one end is required to connect the OEE to a terminal strip or ET 00/ET 00. Order No. 6GA AA00 6GA AA00 Type OEC -3-- OEC Encoding 6-bit grey code 6-bit grey code Characteristic Square () Square () Power supply DCV 8to36 8to36 Current consumption ma Output ± 0 V ± 0 ma Required load max. 500 Ω, % Temperature range C 0to+60 0to+60 Service life Hours of operation Connection Female sub D connector DA5 with strain relief Female sub D connector DA5 with strain relief Degree of protection IP 54 IP 54 Weight g Approx. 350 Approx. 350 Connecting cable Order No. 3SX4 3 with DA 5 male connector,.5 m long, approx. 00 g + K HL A E A = H 3 K H= JE?! H C HA I I EL A, EHA? JE I EC = HEC D J 8 ) # " #!! # % # " # A H F E J = EC A J M EJD -, 8 ), EHA? JE I EC = A BJ )A 0 - # & = Output characteristic of the opto-electronic encoder for analog setpoints Plug pins Core color + 4 V power supply Red 0 V ground Black ± 0 V/± 0 ma Green 4/8 Siemens HE. 999

164 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Technical data Wire-wound potentiometer 6KA9 94 The wire-wound potentiometers have a "zero region" at the their midpoint (master controller midpoint). The version with the bent characteristic curve allows precise operation of the drive at low speeds. The wire-wound potentiometers must be powered by the control unit via two adjustable alignment resistors, or supplied with a regulated DC voltage from the exterior. Order No. 6KA9 94-6KA9 94- Type T 78 T 30 Rating (0 C) W.5.5 Linearity error % Resistance tolerance % Total resistance kω x.4 x Weight g Characteristic Linear, bent Linear Mechanical life Cycles Other resistance values are available on request Circuit diagram of the nonlinear wire-wound potentiometer Characteristic of the nonlinear wire-wound potentiometer Circuit diagram of the linear wire-wound potentiometer n* Speedsetpoint U Voltage α Angle of rotation Characteristic of the linear wire-wound potentiometer Siemens HE /9

165 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Selecting and ordering data Versions with goldplated contacts for currents A,suitablefor electronics No. of switching contacts for the surface mounting switches ➀ ➁ Normal version Order No. 3SJ3 00 3SJ3 00 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 0 3SJ3 0 3SJ3 03 3SJ3 04 3SJ3 05 3SJ3 06 3SJ3 3SJ3 0 3SJ3 0 3SJ3 03 3SJ3 04 3SJ3 05 3SJ3 06 3SJ3 3SJ3 03 3SJ3 03 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 04 3SJ3 04 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 05 3SJ3 05 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 06 3SJ3 06 3SJ SJ SJ SJ3 066 Weight approx. kg Ruggedized version Order No. 3SJ3 0 3SJ3 0 3SJ3 03 3SJ3 04 3SJ3 05 3SJ3 06 3SJ3 3SJ3 3SJ3 3SJ3 3 3SJ3 4 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 6 3SJ3 3SJ3 3SJ3 3SJ3 3 3SJ3 4 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 6 3SJ3 3SJ3 3 3SJ3 3 3SJ3 33 3SJ3 34 3SJ3 35 3SJ3 36 3SJ3 3SJ3 4 3SJ3 4 3SJ3 43 3SJ3 44 3SJ3 45 3SJ3 46 3SJ3 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 53 3SJ3 54 3SJ3 55 3SJ3 56 3SJ3 3SJ3 6 3SJ3 6 3SJ3 63 3SJ3 64 3SJ3 65 3SJ3 66 Weight approx. kg Switching lever (see page 4/ for other Order No. suffixes) Grip Grip with momentary-action pushbutton Grip with latch for mechanical zero position locking Grip with latch as pushbutton With ball With ball with momentary-action pushbutton With ball with dead man pushbutton With ball with capacitive dead man pushbutton ) With ball with signal button With ball for mechanical zero position locking Double lever drive ) Selecting and ordering notes. Select the circuit (contact arrangement) according to the equipment diagrams.. Determine the number of required contacts from the contact arrangement. 3. Normal or ruggedized version, with or without spring return. 4. Switching lever version, add to the Order No.: 5. Switch arrangement, add to the Order @@ 4/0 Siemens HE. 999

166 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Selecting and ordering data No. of switching contacts for the surface mounting switches ➀ ➁ Versions with rein- forced silver contacts 4 for currents of up to 4 A Normal version Order No. 3SJ3 50 3SJ3 50 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 53 3SJ3 54 3SJ3 55 3SJ3 56 3SJ3 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 5 3SJ3 53 3SJ3 54 3SJ3 55 3SJ3 56 3SJ3 3SJ3 53 3SJ3 53 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 54 3SJ3 54 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 55 3SJ3 55 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 56 3SJ3 56 3SJ SJ SJ SJ3 566 Weight approx. kg Ruggedized version Order No. 3SJ3 60 3SJ3 60 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 6 3SJ3 6 3SJ3 63 3SJ3 64 3SJ3 65 3SJ3 66 3SJ3 3SJ3 6 3SJ3 6 3SJ3 63 3SJ3 64 3SJ3 65 3SJ3 66 3SJ3 3SJ3 63 3SJ3 63 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 64 3SJ3 64 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 65 3SJ3 65 3SJ SJ SJ SJ SJ3 3SJ3 66 3SJ3 66 3SJ SJ SJ SJ3 666 Weight approx. kg Switching lever (See page 4/ for other Order No. suffixes) Grip Grip with momentary-action pushbutton Grip with latch for mechanical zero position locking Grip with latch as pushbutton With ball With ball with momentary-action pushbutton With ball with dead man pushbutton With ball with capacitive dead man pushbutton ) With ball with signal button With ball for mechanical zero position locking Double lever drive ) Mounting surfaces for the surfacemounting switches, add to the Order 7. For additional fitted parts, add -Z to the Order Z with additional codes. ) Order No. with -Z and additional code HA ) Order No. with -Z and additional code HB Siemens HE /

167 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Selecting and ordering data Standard circuits No. of contacts Arrangement No. ) Order No. suffix for surface mounting switch ➁ Contact arrangement for surface mounting switches ➀ and ➁ a 6 NEP ak NEP uk(0) NEP ehk(0) NEP ek(0) gk(0) NEP 6 07 NEP 6 6 ehk(0) ek(0) NEP 6 73 NEP 6 74 gk(0) NEP 6 6 Contactor controller; ak, uk(0), ehk(0), ek(0), gk(0) Contactor controller; ak, uk(0), ehk(0), ek(0), gk(0) 6 NEP Single-lever grab control (holding winch) with contactor controller (closing winch) 6 NEP with H-gate 6 NEP 6 08 "csak", "csk", and variable-speed DC drives with field weakening Variable-speed DC drives without field weakening 6 6 NEP NEP m 4 NEP 6 08 Variable-speed drives with field weakening stage (engaged) and OEE 4 MSP 0 Variable-speed drives without field weakening stage, with OEE 4 MSP 0 Without contact arrangement or without surface mounting up to switch With contact arrangement, as required: Additional codes: "J0Y" for surface mounting switch ➀, "K0Y" for surface mounting switch ➁, please also enclose contact arrangement sketch (see form on page 4/8) and indicate the corresponding surface mounting switch ➀ or ➁ in the order text. up to D D E E F F B B Q Q H H G G J J H H M M N N P P S S T T K K X X Y Y A A Z Z Assignment of mounting surfaces to direction of movement of the switching lever Direction of movement for Switch ➁ Switch ➀ Direction of movement for Direction of movement Switch ➀ Switch ➁ Direction of movement ) Equipment diagrams of the surface mounting switches with the corresponding arrangement numbers, see pages 4/4-4/7. ) Latch 3) Lateral movement: mounting surfaces D, E 4) Longitudinal movement: mounting surfaces A, B, C 4/ Siemens HE. 999

168 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Selecting and ordering data Add-on parts Opto-electronic encoder 6GA4 603-AA00 (6-bit, digital) on surface mounting switch ➀: OrderNo.suffix Z andcode A03 ) on surface mounting switch ➁: Order No.suffix Z and code A04 ) Opto-electronic encoder 6GA4 603-AA00 (8-bit, digital) on surface mounting switch ➀: OrderNo.suffix Z andcode A05 ) on surface mounting switch ➁: Order No.suffix Z and code A06 ) Opto-electronic encoder 6GA AA00 (analog, ± 0 V) on surface mounting switch ➀: OrderNo.suffix Z andcode A07 ) on surface mounting switch ➁: Order No.suffix Z and code A08 ) Opto-electronic encoder 6GA AA00 (analog, ± 0 ma) on surface mounting switch ➀: OrderNo.suffix Z andcode A09 ) on surface mounting switch ➁: Order No.suffix Z and code A0 ) Nonlinear wire-wound potentiometer 6KA9 94 on surface mounting switch ➀: Order No.suffix Z and code B0 on surface mounting switch ➁: Order No.suffix Z and code B0 Linear wire-wound potentiometer 6KA9 94 on surface mounting switch ➀: Order No.suffix Z and code B03 on surface mounting switch ➁: Order No.suffix Z and code B04 H-gate for single-lever grab controller Order No. suffix Z and code C0 Gate as required Order No. suffix Z and code Y0 and pls. enclose contact arrangement sketch Detent wheel according to special specification for surface mounting switch ➀: Order No.suffix Z and code Y0 for surface mounting switch ➁: Order No.suffix Z and code Y0 Spring return for surface mounting switch ➀: Order No.suffix Z and code D0 for surface mounting switch ➁: Order No.suffix Z and code D0 Friction brake on surface mounting switch ➀: OrderNo.suffix Z andcode E0 on surface mounting switch ➁: OrderNo.suffix Z and code E0 ) A connecting cable 3SX475 is additionally required. It must be ordered separately (see section "Spare parts" on page 4/9). ) A connecting cable 3SX43 is additionally required. It must be ordered separately (see section "Spare parts" on page 4/9). 3SJ3...@ Z Specify the codes additively Ordering example Order No. Double master controller 3SJ3, normal version 3SJ3 036 Surface mounting switch ➀ for hoisting winch, standard circuit >>csk<< Arrangement No. NEP (from equipment diagram, page 4/4 ff.): 6 contacts Surface mounting switch ➁ for running gear, standard circuit >>ak<< Arrangement No. NEP (from equipment diagram, page 4/4 ff.): contacts Switching lever with ball as dead man pushbutton Arrangement No. NEP for surface mounting switch ➀ S Arrangement No. NEP for surface mounting switch ➁ E Arrangement of surface mounting switches ➀ on mounting surface B; ➁ on mounting surface D 0 Identification of special version Z Wire-wound potentiometer fitted to surface mounting switch ➀ (order code) B0 Please specify on the order: 3SJ3 036-SE0-Z B0 Siemens HE /3

169 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Equipment circuit diagrams The graphic symbols shown on the equipment circuit diagrams only indicate the type, circuit and method of operation of the equipment according to DIN 40 73, but not its design. A closed switching contact is identified by this symbol: ==== =====. The switching contacts assigned to the cams next to the contact arrangement, indicate the control state at the zero position. If the shaft (cam shaft) is rotated to the right, the switching program shown to the left of the zero position becomes effective. Overlap: -0 with with 0-00 Arrangement No. NEP Arrangement No. NEP Circuit "ak" Circuit "uk(0)" with time-delay relay, position (4) Lowering is blocked Overlap: 3-03 with 5-05; 8-08 with 0-00; 3-03 with 8-08 Overlap: -0 with 9-09; 4-04 with 5-05; -0 with 4-04; 4-04 with 3-03 Arrangement No. NEP Circuit "ehk(0)" with time-delay relay Arrangement No. NEP 6 07 Circuit "ek(0)" with time-delay relay 4/4 Siemens HE. 999

170 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Equipment circuit diagrams 3 Overlap: 7-07 with 9-09; 7-07 with 4-04; 7-07 with 3-03; 7-07 with 5-05 Arrangement No. NEP 6 6 Circuit "gk(0)" with time-delay relay Overlap: 3-03 with 5-05; 8-08 with -0; 3-03 with 8-08; 8-08 with 0-00 Arrangement No. NEP 6 73 Circuit "ehk(0)" with SIMOMAT control monitor Overlap: -0 with 3-03; 3-03 with 5-05; -0 with 9-09; 3-03 with 8-08 Overlap: 7-07 with 3-03; 7-07 with 5-05; 7-07 with 4-04; 7-07 with 9-09 Arrangement No. NEP 6 74 Circuit "ek(0)" with SIMOMAT control monitor Arrangement No. NEP 6 6 Circuit "gk(0)" with SIMOMAT control monitor Siemens HE /5

171 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Equipment circuit diagrams Arrangement No. NEP Circuit "a" Arrangement No. NEP Circuits "csak", "csk" and for variable-speed DC drives with field weakening Arrangement No. NEP Circuits for variable-speed DC drives without field weakening Arrangement No. NEP 6 08 Circuit "m" Overlap: 6-06 with 3-03; 6-06 with 5-05 Arrangement No. NEP Single-lever grab control with contactor controller (holding winch) Arrangement No. NEP 6 08 Single-lever grab control with contactor controller (closing winch) 4/6 Siemens HE. 999

172 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Equipment circuit diagrams Overlap: 6-06 with 4-04; 6-06 with 5-05 Arrangement No. NEP Arrangement No. MSP 0 3 Circuits with contactor controller Digital master controller for variable-speed drives without field weakening stage Arrangement No. MSP 0 Digital master controller for variable-speed drives with engaged field-weakening stage Siemens HE /7

173 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Equipment circuit diagrams Form for equipment circuit diagram Please copy this page for and 4/7); enter the desired switch designs which differ arrangement and enclose the from our standard contact sheet with the order. arrangements (pages 4/4 4/8 Siemens HE. 999

174 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Spare parts Spare parts for 3SJ3 Drive block Detent disc 3SX4 4 Microswitch 3SX4 36 Description Order No. Weight approx. kg normal version 3SX4 3 ) 0.75 ruggedized version 3SX4 3 ).05 Surface mounting with contacts A (E) ) without arrangement switch with arrangement ) 3SX4 5 0A 0@ ) A without arrangement A with arrangement ) with 4 contacts A (E) ) without arrangement with arrangement ) 3SX4 5 0A 0@ ) A without arrangement A with arrangement ) with 6 contacts A (E) ) without arrangement with arrangement ) 3SX4 53 0A 0@ ) A without arrangement A with arrangement ) with 8 contacts A (E) ) without arrangement with arrangement ) 3SX4 54 0A 0@ ) A without arrangement A with arrangement ) with 0 contacts A (E) ) without arrangement 3SX4 55 0A 0.5 with arrangement ) 0@ ) with contacts 4 A without arrangement A with arrangement ) A (E) ) without arrangement 3SX4 56 0A with arrangement ) 0@ ) 4 A without arrangement A with arrangement ) 0.54 Switching element with contacts A, gold-plated (E) ) 3SX with contacts 4 A, silver 3SX4 44 Cam discs Wire hook ( set = pieces) for pulling the cam disc Bellows 3SX Switching lever with grip with grip with mechanical zero position locking with grip with momentary-action pushbutton with grip with latch as pushbutton 3SX4 00 3SX4 64 3SX4 34 3SX Microswitch with mounting parts 3SX Spring return 3SX Friction brake 3SX Gate SX H-gate for single-lever grab controller 3SX Detent disc Detent spring Detent lever Gear segment Spur gear Bevel gear Connecting cable Wire-wound potentiometer with ball with ball with dead man pushbutton with ball with momentary-action pushbutton with ball with horn button with ball for mechanical zero position locking ( set with 3 pieces of different strength) ( set = pieces) with DA 5 male connector for OEC, digital with DA 5 male connector for OEC, analog linear nonlinear 3SX4 45 3SX4 46 3SX4 65 3SX4 66 3SX4 67 3SX4 68 3SX4 70 3SX4 4 3SX4 43 3SX4 7 3SX4 60 3SX4 6 3SX4 6 3SX4 75 3SX4 3 6KA9 94 6KA Opto-electronic encoder 6-bit, digital 8-bit, digital analog, ± 0 V analog, ± 0 ma 6GA4 603AA00 6GA4 603AA00 6GA4 6033AA00 6GA4 6034AA ) E = suitable for electronics ) For switches with arrangement: Insert Order No. suffix for the arrangement (see page 4/) and specify switch serial number. 3) Order No. suffixes such as duplex master controller 3SJ3: Insert Order No. suffixes for the switching lever or grip according to page 4/0 and for assignment of mounting surfaces to directions of movement of the switching lever according to page 4/ Siemens HE /9

175 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Dimension drawings Type Number of contacts Dimension L L L L surface mounting Analog setpoint generator Digital setpoint generator switch (wire-wound (opto-electronic (Opto-electronic encoder) potentiometer) encoder) 6-bit version 8-bit version 3SJ /0 Siemens HE. 999

176 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Double master controller 3SJ3 Dimension drawings Wire-wound potentiometer 6KA9 94- Opto-electronic encoder 6GA4 603-AA00, -AA00, -3AA00, -4AA Siemens HE /

177 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 Applications Regulations Climatic resistance The grab differential limit switch is an auxiliary current limit switch which is used for the single-lever grab controller and is driven by the holding and closing winch. It has the following tasks: Switching off the closing motor when the closing or opening operation has ended, independently of the height of the grab, and activation of the holding motor when closing has ended, for the transition to the hoisting movement. Switching off the hoisting and closing motor when the highest or lowest position of the grab is reached. Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 00 complies with DIN VDE , Part 00 "Auxiliary current switches, general requirements". Climatic regions A, H, M and T to DIN 50 09, Part : Climatic group "General" to IEC 7-- Climatic class F to Siemens standard DN 9 070, Part The standard version in degree of protection IP 54 can be operated at ambient temperatures between 5 C and +70 C. Design and method of operation Grab differential limit switches are equipped with two adjustable couplings and a curvedtooth coupling (BoWex). The adjustable coupling on the differential gearing side is arranged with a coupling half for fitting pinions or sprockets (over-mounting). A special wrench is fitted in the housing cover and is needed to adjust the cam discs. Provided separately are two clamp sleeves which are used on the holding shaft for reversal of the direction of rotation, as well as two washers, six screws and two spring washers for the closing winch coupling. The switch contains six cam switching elements which are used as auxiliary current limit switches (see unit circuit diagram). As can be seen in the dimension drawing, the switch has two shaft systems which must be driven by the holding and closing winch. Switching elements N5, N6 are limit switches for the highest and lowest positions of the grab. The limits for "Grab closed" and "Grab opened" are monitored by switching elements N and N4. Switching elements N and N3 initiate switching operations for the single-lever grab controller. 4/ Siemens HE. 999

178 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 Mounting For practical reasons, the switch is arranged on one side of the winch room between the winch drums so that it is easily accessible. The switch can be positioned horizontally but can also be fitted on a sloping or vertical wall. The horizontal position is preferable because when the cover is removed, the switching and gear elements can be more easily reached from above. It is best to drive the switch via auxiliary shafts which, in turn, are driven by the winch axles of the grab drive. The connection from the closing winch is made at shaft on the differential gearing side. Shaft is connected to the holding winchonthesameoropposite side of the switch. The auxiliary shafts can be driven by pinions, bevel gears or worm gear. Sprocket drives can also be used; the connections should then be made on shafts and on the differential gearing side. (Drive reduction ratios should be calculated according to the operating instructions.) If the auxiliary shafts cannot be arranged at the height of the winch axes, it is advisable to use universal joints because these allow more flexibility in arranging the switch Permissible mounting position Maintenance Grab differential limit switches should be inspected every six months if possible, and maintained according to the operating instructions. 6 Technical data Mechanical Life million switching operations Continuous current I e 5 A Switching frequency Max. of 600 switching cycles / h RatedinsulationvoltageV i 500 V Rated voltage V in Up to 500 V AC 50 Hz Test voltage.5 kv Rating making capacity at 40 to 60 Hz, cos ϕ =0.4 (for contactor coils) at 30 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC 5 A 0 A 5 A Rated breaking capacity 50 A Creepage distances and Insulation group C (DIN VDE 00 b) clearances Conductor Cross-sections, solid x 0 mm² or x 6 mm² Degree of protection to DIN IP 54 (standard version) IP 56 (special version) Coating Stone grey (RAL 7030) Siemens HE /3

179 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 00 Selecting and ordering data Degree of protection Auxiliary switching elements Order No. Weight Rated current Quantity A kg IP SJ IP SJ Spare parts Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 00, view of the interior Description Item in figure Order No. Weight approx. kg Cam switching element 3 3PX9 0-A 0.7 Cam discs 7 set (6 pieces, the discs are only supplied as a set) 3SY Housing (comprising housing cover and housing 9 3SY lower section) Coupling halves - With external gearing 4 3SY With external gearing (for fitting gears and sprockets) for connection to the closing winch 3SX With internal gearing and scale ring 3SY Retainer for switching element support 6 3SY BoWex coupling M-4 5 3SY Slotted nut M35 x.5 8 3SY Special wrench 3SX /4 Siemens HE. 999

180 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 Unit circuit diagram 3 4 Grab differential limit switch with grab closed and at highest position 5 6 Siemens HE /5

181 Switchgear and control equipment Master controllers, differential limit switches Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 Dimension drawings Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 00 Adjustable coupling with mounting for spur gear or sprocket wheel 4/6 Siemens HE. 999

182 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Summary Hoisting gear in modern production processes and large loading and unloading facilities must satisfy great and manysided demands. This does not only apply to the mechanical and electrical equipment of the cranes. Optimum working conditions must also be created for the crane operator so that he can concentrate fully on his tasks. This requirement is met by the crane controllers offered here. They allow an expedient arrangement of switchgear so that the crane operator has a good view of the entire working area of the crane, with the least possible physical stress. The crane controllers are designed to be set up even in small and very confined crane cabs. They offer space not only for mounting the master controllers, but also for pushbuttons and indicator lamps for controlling and monitoring the crane switch and the auxiliary circuits. The following versions are available: Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Ergonomically shaped housings made of polyurethane foam are arranged on both sides of a comfortable, highgrade upholstered seat. Duplex master controllers 3SJ3, control and signaling devices as well as panel meters can be installed as standard in these housings. Adjustable-height armrests with recessed positioning are fitted in the housings at the inner rear. Advantages: Standard unit with maximum convenience Well designed, enclosed unit Rotatable by 80 to one side and 90 to the other side on a base foot 3 Swivelling crane control chair with manual and/or motorized adjustment ) Manual adjustment Motorized adjustment Horizontal and vertical seat surface. Adjustable inclination of the seat surface, backrest and armrests. Weight adjustment for optimum spring action, horizontal and vertical control consoles. Height adjustment of seat with control consoles at rear and/or front (inclination adjustment). Longitudinal adjustment of seat with consoles. Selector pushbutton for motorized adjustment in the console. V DC motor Crane driver s seat ) Crane control columns ) Duplex master controllers 3SJ3 as well as control devices such as pushbuttons, knob-operated switches and indicator lamps can be installed in the rectangular column. Advantage: suitable for all cranes with small and compact cabs. ) On request. Siemens HE /7

183 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Design The rotatable crane controller 3SJ9 30 comprises: A high-grade and comfortable upholstered seat, optionally with or without headrest and seatbelt Two ergonomically shaped housings made of polyurethane foam. This material is particularly pleasant to touch with the hand Recessed armrests which are height adjustable Rotating foot with horizontal cross-member duct with which the housings and upholstered seat are connected. The unit can be rotated by 90 to the left and 80 to the right on its rotating foot. The housings are divided. The upper part swings open to the front and the outer cover of the lower part can be removed entirely, so that the built-in equipment and all connections are easily accessible. The front of the upper parts is inclined and are therefore more easily viewed by the crane operator. This surface is intended for important fault indicators, operator signals and meters. The upholstered seat is secured on a cover of the crossmember duct and can be swiveled fully forward. Equipment installed in the crossmember duct can therefore be accessed without difficulty. The rotatable crane controller can be supplied unwired or with completed internal wiring. The rotatable crane controller can also be supplied with height adjustment, that is, the cross-member duct with the side elements and upholstered seat is raised with respect to the rotating frame (please inquire). Built-in elements The following can be installed in each housing upper section: On mounting surface E inclined within view, ahead of the switching lever - or panel meters, LCD or 8 indicator lamps ( mm diam.) up to 75 mm max. mounting depth On mounting surface E housing top - One or two duplex master controllers 3SJ3 - Up to 4 control devices 3SB ( mm diam.) on the surface behind the switching lever, if only duplex master controller is installed - Up to 5 control devices 3SB ( mm diam.) if two duplex master controllers are installed - Control switch 3LF 00 (depending on the other installed elements) - Gooseneck microphone instead of two signaling devices - Telephone in the rear area next to the armrests (can be installed recessed or positioned detached) The following can be installed in each housing lower section: One terminal strip with terminals up to size 6 One electronic terminal strip ET 00 Matching amplifier for setpoint generator Setpoint generator for variable-speed drives Master controllers fitted with an analog or digital setpoint generator are needed for controlling variable-speed drives. The following can be fitted in the housing of the crane control seat: Digital master controller 3SJ3 with opto-electronic encoder (OEE) Master controller 3SJ3 with wire-wound potentiometer Accessories The following can additionally be fitted or supplied at extra cost: An adjustable-height headrest for the upholstered seat A seatbelt with two-point attachment or with automatic roll and three-point attachment A highly flexible cable harness, connected to the terminal strip, with free cable ends can be supplied for the outer wiring. Wiring For crane controllers with finished internal wiring, the connections of all integral equipment are made on a terminal strip with terminals up to size 6 or an electronic terminal strip ET 00. The cables of the outer wiring are routed from the terminal strip through the rotating foot into the cable base of the crane cab. On account of the mechanical stress when the crane controller seat is rotated, we recommend singlecore non-sheathed cables 5DR7 053 for these connections. To prevent damage to the cables during rotation of the crane controller, they must be clamped and bunched in the cross-member duct, before the transition to the rotating foot. The cable base of the cab must be at least 00 mm in depth. 4/8 Siemens HE. 999

184 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Possibility of mounting double master switches and setpoint generators Duplex master controllers 3SJ3, even fitted with setpoint generators for variable speed drives, can be installed in the two housings with the following switch arrangements. The full order numbers of the double master controllers are listed in the table in Section "Selecting and ordering data" (page4/0to4/3). Double master switches View from above Direction of movement Order No. Location of mounting surface Size of possible surface mounting switches and setpoint generators 3SJ Switch : tocontactelements C or 3SJ Z Switch : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the set- point generator. 3SJ3... Switch : tocontactelements C or 3SJ3...-Z Switch : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the setpoint generator. 3 3SJ Switches and : tocontactelements 3SJ Z C / E or Switch : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the setpoint generator. 4 Switch:tocontactelements tocontactelements or Switch:tocontactelements 5 Switch : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the setpoint generator. or 6 Switches and : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the setpoint generator. 3SJ Switches and : tocontactelements C/E or 3SJ Z Switch : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the setpoint generator. Switch : to 6 contact elements + setpoint generator Only an OEE can be fitted as the setpoint generator. 3SJ Switches and : tocontactelements C/E or 3SJ Z Switch : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or a wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the setpoint generator. Switch : to 6 contact elements + setpoint generator Only an OEE can be fitted as the setpoint generator. 3SJ Switch : tocontactelements 3SJ Z E or Switch : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the setpoint generator. 3SJ3...4-Z 4 Switch : to contact elements + setpoint generator An OEE or wire-wound potentiometer can be fitted as the setpoint generator. E Siemens HE /9

185 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Possibility of mounting double master switches and setpoint generators! " # # % $ $ 7 F D I JA D = EH ', Mounting surface E Mounting surface E 3 Panel meter 4 Indicator lamps, mm Ø 5 Connected drive, duplex master controller 3SJ3 6 Signaling devices, mm Ø 7 Cross-member duct mounted on rotating foot as support for the upholstered seat and the housing 8 Armrests, recessed, height adjustable 9 Telephone D Digital setpoint generator or wire-wound potentiometer & & # ) 0 - # & & Technical data Regulations DIN VDE 0660, Part 00 Degree of protection IP 54 IEC EN Paint coating of metal parts Anthracite grey RAL 90 IEC 59 DIN Color shade of insulating material Anthracite grey 64 housings and covers Permissible ambient temperature for operation for storage -40 Cto+60 C -50 Cto+60 C Climatic resistance Damp heat, constant Damp heat, cyclic DIN 68, Part -3, DIN IEC 68, Part -30 4/30 Siemens HE. 999

186 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Ordering data for swivelling crane control chair Version Order No. Weight without fitted parts approx. kg Basic version Rotating foot with cross-member duct, upholstered seat, 3SJ9 30-0A 90 housings without connection terminals no fitted equipment degree of protection IP 54 Version Code Weight, net approx. kg Special version Headrest on upholstered seat K0 Seatbelt with -point attachment L0 0.5 Seatbelt with automatic roll and 3-point attachment for braces L0 belt Please specify on the order: Order number with suffix -Z and the appropriate code For inquiries and orders, please copy the "Inquiry and order sheets to 3" (pages 4/3, 4/34, 4/36, 4/38 and 4/39) and enclose them with the inquiry/order after filling them out Siemens HE /3

187 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Inquiry and order sheet 4/3 Siemens HE. 999

188 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Explanations for the inquiry and order sheet a Enter the customer s name, order reference, item and date. s Enter the quantity and check the desired version. d Enter the quantity and full order number of the duplex master controllers to be fitted (see table in Section "Selecting and ordering data" (page 4/0 to 4/3). f Enter the quantity of add-on parts to be fitted to the duplex master controllers. g Enter the quantity of control and signaling devices to be fitted. h Enter the quantity of other devices to be fitted. For the microphone and telephone, also check the desired side. Matching amplifiers are installed in the lower housing section and are easily accessible. Panel meters are always fitted in mounting surface E (see Inquiry and order sheet 3). For a gooseneck microphone, twomountinglocationsfor signaling devices are usually required. A telephone is installed recessed at mounting surface E, rear area next to the armrest, or left detached. j Check whether the controller is to be supplied without internal wiring or with finished internal wiring, and whether a cable harness for outer wiring is to be supplied. k Mounting facility : One or two duplex master controllers 3SJ3 can be fitted per side element or at mounting surface E. Fields 0 to 58 are intended for control and signaling devices of mm diameter. The fields which can be occupied depend on the version of duplex master controllers to be fitted, and are shownontheinquiryandorder sheets 3. and 3. (pages 4/38 and 4/39). l a s d g f h j Mounting facility : Up to eight indicator lamps of mm diameter, or the following panel meters, can be fitted at mounting surface E: with 7 x 7 mm frame dimension or with 96 x 96 mm frame dimension or l k with 7 x 44 mm Maximum mounting depth frame dimension or 75 mm. See inquiry and order LCDupto7x44 sheet 3 (page 4/36). mm frame dimension Siemens HE /33

189 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Inquiry and order sheet 4/34 Siemens HE. 999

190 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Explanations on inquiry and order sheet ; According to the directions of movement of the switching lever, enter the driving unit designations, data on the double master controller, circuit diagram and, in the case of wiring, the destination reference. A If a mechanical pushbutton, mechanical latch or capacitive dead man button is to be fitted in the ball of the switching lever or in the grip, enter the function here and, in the case of wiring, also the destination reference. S The lettering of the labels for the drives should be entered in these field markings. The lettering can also be in a foreign language; in that case, pleasemaketheentryintherequired language or provide the translation on a separate sheet. A maximum of 4 characters arepossibleperfield. per ; A S Siemens HE /35

191 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Inquiry and order sheet 3 4/36 Siemens HE. 999

192 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Explanations on inquiry and order sheet 3 The panel instruments, LCD or signaling devices to be fitted at mounting surface E are entered on inquiry and order sheet 3. Only devices with a mounting depth of up to 75 mm can be fitted at mounting surface E. The following can optionally be fitted at locations M-M4: two panel meters 7 x 7 mm or one panel meter 96 x 96 mm or one panel instrument 7 x 44 mm or one LCD, up to 7 x 44 mm; the maximum possible mounting depth must not be exceeded. Locations L-L8 are primarily intended for indicator lamps. If indicator lamps or illuminated pushbuttons with series element are to be fitted, the maximum possible mounting depth must be observed here too. The mixed mounting of indicator lamps and meters is also possible. The space for four indicator lamps is taken up by a panel meter of 7 x 7 mm Siemens HE /37

193 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Inquiry and order sheet 3. 4/38 Siemens HE. 999

194 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Inquiry and order sheet Siemens HE /39

195 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Inquiry and order sheets Explanations for inquiry and order sheets 3. and 3. The control and signaling devices specified on order sheet are assigned to a mounting location in inquiry and order sheets 3. (left side element) and 3. right side element) by marking a mounting location. The numbers in column are identical with the field numbers of the mounting locations given in the figures under the table. If a gooseneck microphone is to be fitted, mounting locations 0 and or 35 and 4 areusedforthepurpose(ifnot otherwise indicated). The mounting locations which can be occupied by signaling devices depend on the installed duplex master controllers and fitted setpoint generators. The possibilities are clearly indicated under the tables. A telephone is usually installed recessed next to the armrest. The telephone can also be left detached. Buzzers or other audible signaling devices are fitted in the interior of the housing lower section. 4/40 Siemens HE. 999

196 Switchgear and control equipment Crane control equipment Swivelling crane control chair 3SJ9 30 Dimension drawing Siemens HE /4

197 Switchgear and control equipment Contactors for hoisting gear equipment Summary Contactors 3RT In hoisting gear technology, contactors are mainly used in contactor combinations for various control tasks. The choice of contactor size is governed by the switching capacity, contact life and service life of the switching mechanism (device life). Contactors 3TF The contactors offered here have a device life of 0 to 5 million switching cycles. The service life of the contacts depends on the mode, jogging contribution and magnitude of the current to be switched. The inrush current of motors does not affect the service life because contactor switching is bounce-free. The section Selection recommendations (page 4/43) lists the permissible currents for hoisting gear motors in intermittent duty S3 for AC contactors 3RT/3TF and the service life of the contacts when switching off the load currents assigned to intermittent duty S3-00 %. The delta circuit is taken as a basis for the rotor contactors. AC contactors 3RT/3TF are used for main circuits: Rated currents Ie/AC- to 630 A For switching on and off three-phase induction motors with slipring rotors For switching the resistance stages in the rotor circuit See Catalog NS K for selecting and ordering data General Applications The contactors are suitable for switching and controlling motors and circuits of all types in AC and three-phase systems. Depending on the application, the use of AC contactors is classified in different utilization categories according to DIN VDE 0660, Part 0. Threephase motors with slipring rotors are often used in hoisting gear operation. Utilization category AC- applies to this application. Utilization categories AC-3 and AC-4 apply to the switching of three-phase squirrel cage motors. AC- operation is the typical duty for starting and switching off fully-loaded slipring motors in the starting phase, during braking by reversal as well as during reversing and jogging mode. However, the typical hoisting gear mixed operation represents lower stress because switching-off operations in stationary duty and partial loads occur. Service life Degree of protection, touch protection Regulations Climatic resistance The service life of the contacts depends especially on the current switched off (see characteristics on page 4/44). Since the contactors switch on with practically no bounce, the inrush current of motors does not affect the service life of the contacts. The contactors comply with degree of protection IP 00 to EC and DIN and are safe to touch with the finger and back of the hand to VBG4. The contactors comply with the "Regulations for low voltage switchgear" of DIN VDE 0660 and IEC AC contactors are climateresistant. Application classes to DIN EN and DIN EN for Siemens low-voltage switchgear Permissible operating temperature: -5 C to +60 C Permissible relative humidity: 50 % at 40 C and 90 % at 0 C 4/4 Siemens HE. 999

198 Switchgear and control equipment Contactors for hoisting gear equipment Selection recommendations In hoisting gear operation, slipring motors are generally used in controlled three-phase drives. For this typical hoisting gear duty, we recommend the contactors listed in the following table. It is assumed that with average load on the drive, and average jogging duty, an adequate life of the contactor contacts is ensured. Under special operating conditions, we recommend selection of the contactors accordingtotheservicelifecharacteristics and the nomogram on page 4/48 for determining the contact service life. Stator contactor Rotor contactor Contactor Max. load current for hoisting gear motors Max. load current with contactor in delta circuit for hoisting gear motors Max. rotor standstill voltage For intermittent duty S3 - For intermittent duty S3-5 % A 5 % A 40 % A 60 % A 00 % A 5 % A 5 % A 40 % A 60 % A 00 % A V Type Selection of RT 04 contactors in RT 05 hoisting gear operation RT RT RT RT RT RT RT TF TF TF TF TF TF TF5 6/ TF6 8/9 When three conducting paths are connected in parallel, the maximum load current is increased by a factor of.5. When two conducting paths are connected in parallel, it rises to.8-time the values given in this table Siemens HE /43

199 Switchgear and control equipment Contactors for hoisting gear equipment Selection recommendations for special operating conditions I a I e Breaking current Rated operating voltage Contact service life of contactors 3RT and 3TF as a function of breaking current at rated operating voltage of 400 V AC, 50 Hz 4/44 Siemens HE. 999

200 Switchgear and control equipment Contactors for hoisting gear equipment Selection recommendations for special operating conditions Selecting the contactors according to service life criteria in normal and jogging operation Although the contactors are subjected to less stress when motors are switched off from steady-state speed (normal operation), arcing is more severe in jogging operation. The starting current of slipring motors can be up to.5-times the motor rated current. This means that this current must also be switched off during jogging, but merely the rated current under full load in normal operation, and even less under partial load. Determining the service life of a contact with utilization category AC- (I c =.5xI e )only produces the right results if 00 % jogging operation is involved. Max. permissible currents and achievable contact Contact service life for switching off the load currents Contactor service life with operational switching of these currents cosϕ 0.4 (.5 x I e ) of the stator contactor I c =I e specified under S3-00%, without jogging contribution Approx. Approx. A switching cycles A switching cycles Type RT RT RT RT RT RT RT RT RT TF TF TF TF TF TF TF5 6/ TF6 8/9 The maximum permissible currents (e.g. locked-rotor currents of motors) must not exceed the values given in this table in the column "Max. permissible currents and achievable contact service life". These values are not increased by contactor circuits connected in parallel Selection of contactors according to service life criteria in mixed operation In the case of mixed opera- X= A / (+(C/00) x (A/B-)) tion, that is, if normal switching duty (switching off the mo- Where B Contact service life with jogtor rated current) with tempo- X Contact service life with ging operation (I a =multiple rary jogging operation (switch- mixed operation in switch- of I e ) in switching cycles, ing off a multiple of the motor ing cycles from characteristics overleaf rated current) is required, the Breaking current I a /AC- = service life of the contacts can A Contact service life with.5 x I e be approximately calculated normal operation (I a =I e )in with the following equation: switching cycles, from diagram on page 4/44 cycles to total cycles in C Contribution of jogging % Thecontactservicelifein in mixed operation can be determined from the characteristics (page 4/46) according to the motor rated current with a jogging contribution of 0, 0, 50 and 00 %. The values determined only apply to continuous operation under rated load of the motor. In practice, the service life of the contacts should be even greater. Siemens HE /45

201 Switchgear and control equipment Contactors for hoisting gear equipment Selection recommendations for special operating conditions Selection of contactors according to service life criteria in mixed operation Contact service life in mixed operation and at.5-times the motor rated current (slipring motor) 4/46 Siemens HE. 999

202 Switchgear and control equipment. Contactors for hoisting gear equipment Selection recommendations for special operating conditions Selection of contactors according to service life criteria in mixed operation Selection example Motor rated current 50 A. Selected contactor: 3TF5 4 Contact service life at 400 V with jogging contribution 0 % switching cycles 0 % switching cycles 50 % switching cycles 00 % switching cycles.0x0 6.7x0 6 x x0 6 Selection example Motor rated current 50 A. Selected contactor: 3TF5 6 Contact service life at 400 V with jogging contribution 0 % switching cycles 0 % switching cycles 50 % switching cycles 00 % switching cycles 4.6x x0 6.3x0 6.4x0 6 Selection example 3 Maximum permissible motor rated current for a contact service life of,000,000 switching cycles at 400 V. Stator contactor Permissible motor rated current of slipring motor with jogging contribution of Type 0 % approx. A 0 % approx. A 50 % approx. A 00 % approx. A 3RT 04 3RT 05 3RT RT 034 3RT 035 3RT RT 044 3RT 045 3RT TF5 3TF TF5 5 3TF5 6/3TF5 7 3TF Apart from the contact service life in switching cycles, technicians are interested in the resultant operating time (service life) until the next replacement of contacts. This value can be read off the nomogram on page 4/48 to determine the contact service life. Siemens HE /47

203 Switchgear and control equipment Contactors for hoisting gear equipment Selection recommendations for special operating conditions Selection of contactors according to service life criteria in mixed operation Nomogram to determine the contact service life in years (with 50 working days) and months with daily durations of operation of 4, 8,, 6, 0 and 4 h Using the nomogram Connect the required number of switching cycles on the lefthand scale to the required number of switching cycles perhourontheright-hand scale. Then, from the intersection with the center line, draw a horizontal line to the left or right to the column with the given, daily duration of operation. Note: If operation takes place on 365 (and not 50 days) of the year, the total operating time found from the nomogram should be multiplied by Example: Requirement:.4 million switching cycles as service life, 00 switching cycles per hour, 6 h operation per day Result: Total operating time approx. 8 months. 4/48 Siemens HE. 999

204 Switchgear and control equipment SIMOMAT K control monitors, 6GA4 65 Description 3 4 SIMOMAT K control monitors Product range Order No. 6GA4 65-DB 6GA4 65-DB Frequency measuring stages of which, safety stages 8 8 Supply voltage 30 V AC, 50/60 Hz 30 V AC, 50/60 Hz ) Signal inputs/outputs 4 V DC 30 V AC, 50/60 Hz 5 V AC, 50/60 Hz Control PLC/contactors PLC/contactors ) Supply voltage 5 V AC 50/60 Hz is possible (re-insert the internal fuse according to the operating instructions). 5 6 Regulations Climatic resistance Applications SIMOMAT K control monitors comply with DIN VDE 060 and DIN VDE 00. SIMOMAT K can be used at ambient temperatures of 0 to +70 C, at an annual average air humidity of 75 %. Moisture condensation is not permissible (humidity class F to DIN ). The SIMOMAT K control monitor is a standalone unit that can be used for all control tasks which can be implemented by measuring the rotor frequency of three-phase induction motors with slipring rotors; for example, the starting of drives in crane installations. The control monitor enables the rotor contactors for switching off the rotor series resistance at a selectable frequency. Similarly, incorrect load movements can be detected and switched off. The unit can be used both in conventional contactor controllers and in programmable controllers (PLCs). Design The electronic circuitry of the SIMOMAT K is accommodated in a sheet metal housing. Situated at the rear is a snapmounting element for 35 mm DINrails.Furthermore,the housing has four mounting holes for M4 screws. The front panel is subdivided into an indicator field and a programming field. Situated in the left half are LEDs to indicate the operating states of the unit and control system. The right half contains a display, five buttons and three LEDs for programming and the test mode. Screw terminals to accept one.5 mm conductor or two.5 mm conductors each are provided for connection of the unit. Siemens HE /49

205 Switchgear and control equipment SIMOMAT K control monitors, 6GA4 65 Description Functioning All signals are processed in a microprocessor in the SIMOMAT K. In the SIMOMAT with triac outputs, all signals and outputs are isolated by optocouplers. Frequency measuring stages S to S6 of the SIMOMAT K8 can be set arbitrarily as starting or plugging stages over therangehzto99hzin steps of Hz. Frequency measuring stages S7 and S8 of the SIMOMAT K8 are configured as safety stages and are set by the microprocessor to 49 (59) Hz or 5 (6) Hz according to the line frequency - 50 or 60 Hz. Enable inputs I and II are also assigned to the starting and plugging stages by the microprocessor, according to the line frequency. Indicators and controls serve for setting frequency measuringstagesstos4(s6)as well as for checking unit functions and the control system with the drive switched off, using an internal frequency generator. Installation The SIMOMAT K is intended for installation in a cabinet. A snap-mounting element can be used for a 35 mm rail to DIN EN 50 0, or it can be mounted on a sheet metal plate with four M4 screws. The point of installation should be dry and free from corrosive vapors. The SIMOMAT K must not be placed within the area of influence of strong electromagnetic fields. It should not be installed next to equipment initiating severe vibration during switching, such as contactors and circuit breakers. The unit should be protected from direct solar radiation or direct heat emission. Connection Screw terminals are provided for connection: these can accept one conductor of up to.5 mm or two conductors of up to.5 mm.flexible, stranded conductors should be fitted with ferrules. The connections to enable frequency measurement are on the top of the unit. The terminals for power connection and the outputs of the switching stages are on the bottom of the unit. Block diagram of the SIMOMAT K, 30 V AC supply I/O 4 V DC 4/50 Siemens HE. 999

206 Switchgear and control equipment SIMOMAT K control monitors, 6GA4 65 Description Connection Block diagram of the SIMOMAT K, 30 V AC supply I/O 30 V AC Test mode The SIMOMAT K can also serve to test functioning of the entire control system with the motor switched off and without the main current of the system. Electromagnetic compatibility Applications Requirements according to EMC guideline Emitted interference Interference immunity Industry EN : 993 EN : 995 Note: The unit meets the described in the operating in- stated requirements with structions are observed during respect to emitted interference installation and operation. and interference immunity, if the installation guidelines Siemens HE /5

207 Switchgear and control equipment SIMOMAT K control monitors, 6GA4 65 Technical data Electrical safety to Class of protection Degree of protection to DIN , IEC 44 DINEN63- I IP 0 Storage temperature Operating environment temperature Relative humidity Pollution severity Overvoltage category 0 C to+70 C 0 C to+60 C (-0 C onrequest) Up to 95 % without moisture condensation II Ratedinsulationvoltage: -Rotorvoltage - Power supply - Enable inputs - Triac outputs - DC switching outputs 750 V AC 50 V AC 50 V AC; 36 V DC 50 V AC 36 V DC Supply voltage 30 V AC ±5 %, 50 to 60 Hz or 5 V AC ±5 %, 50 to 60 Hz (selectable) Power consumption of power supply 5VA Permissible rotor standstill voltage 50 to 600 V AC SIMOMAT K switching outputs AC 50/60 Hz 30 V 4 V DC - Switching capacity 3000 VA 4W - Permissible continuous current of outputs 3 A, not short-circuit-proof 00 ma, short-circuit-proof - Closing resistance of outputs 00 mω 00 to 500 mω - 4 V supply of the DC switching outputs A The triac switching outputs are isolated from each other in the unit. Housing material Aluminum/Zincor sheet metal, surface treated Weight Approx g Selecting and ordering data Unit/type Measuring stages Labeling Outputs Order No. SIMOMAT K8 8 starting or plugging stages, German 4 V DC 6GA4 65-DB of which English 4 V DC are safety stages German English 30 V AC 50/60 Hz 30 V AC 6GA4 65-DB 4/5 Siemens HE. 999

208 Switchgear and control equipment SIMOMAT K control monitors, 6GA4 65 Examples of connections SIMOMAT K8, supply 30 V AC, I/O 4 V DC Siemens HE /53

209 4/54 Siemens HE. 999 Dimension drawings SIMOMAT K control monitors, 6GA4 65 Switchgear and control equipment

210 T300 technology software for crane systems 5/ Product description 5/ Application 5/ Software modules 5/3 Brief description of the functions 5/4 Selecting and ordering data Siemens HE /

211 T300 technology software for crane systems Product description Application For the closed-loop control of hoisting gear drives with the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES system and SIMOREG DC MASTER, the T300 technology module and the hoisting gear-specific software can be used to implement additional functions which are not contained in the basic unit. Some examples of applications are: Formation of the loaddependent additional setpoint with field weakening Position detection and position control Grab-specific software for the holding and closing winch Synchro control Six hoisting gear-specific software modules are available for the various applications. These modules are created using the STRUC configuring language. The software is provided in an EPROM with the corresponding documentation (in German or English). The corresponding T300 module with terminal block SE300 must be ordered separately. The detailed description of the T300 technology module is contained in Catalog DA65.0, Edition 998, Section 6. Software modules The following is a list of the various software modules: Software module for Functions contained Software module for Functions contained Hoisting gear Holding gear. Load-depended field weakening. Nonlinear master controller setpoint 3. Heavy-duty operation (reduced setpoint) 4. Position/displacement control 5. Pre-limit switching 6. Inching operation 7. Starting pulse 8. Changeover of ramp-function generator for field weakening and heavy-duty service 9. Speed zero signal 0. Control monitoring. Speed actual value monitoring. Synchro control (master/slave drive) 3. Current distribution monitoring (master/slave drive). Nonlinear master controller setpoint 3. Heavy-duty service (reduced setpoint) 4. Position/displacement control 5. Pre-limit switching 6. Jogging operation 7. Starting pulse 8. Changeover of ramp-function generator for field weakening and heavy-duty service 9. Speed zero signal 0. Control monitoring. Speed actual value monitoring 4. Constant field weakening 5. Slack cable control Slewing gear Travelling gear ) Travelling gear ) (slave drive). Nonlinear master controller setpoint 4. Position/displacement control 5. Pre-limit switching 6. Jogging operation 9. Speed zero signal 0. Control monitoring. Speed actual value monitoring. Reach-dependent ramp-up time. Override of ramp-up and down times according to error signal 3. Reach-dependent speed of rotation. Nonlinear master controller setpoint 4. Position/displacement control 5. Pre-limit switching 6. Jogging operation 9. Speed zero signal 0. Control monitoring. Speed actual value monitoring. Synchro control (master/slave drive) 9. Speed zero signal 0. Control monitoring. Speed actual value monitoring 3. Current distribution monitoring (master/slave drive) 4. Synchro control Closing gear 6. Jogging operation 7. Starting pulse 9. Speed zero signal 0. Control monitoring. Speed actual value monitoring 6. Grab displacement control 7. Grab adjustment 8. Synchro control for lifting beam operation 9. Current compensation control 0. Cactus grab operation Note: The functions not shown in bold type can be implemented as standard in the basic unit. These functions are also stored on the T300 module to ensure reliable execution of the software modules. ) If travelling gear is operated with two power units, both modules are used. The function "Synchro control (master/slave drive) No. " is not effective in travelling gear with one power unit. 5/ Siemens HE. 999

212 T300 technology software for crane systems Brief description of the functions The functions described below are standard modules. Application-specific functions can also be implemented at extra cost. The corresponding documentation is supplied in German or English.. Load-dependent field weakening Load-dependent field weakening allows speeds above the rated speed, with partial loads. In this case, when field weakening is selected (via the master controller) a supplementary speed setpoint is formed as a function of the load, in addition to the value specified by the master controller for the rated speed range, and the field weakening mode is initiated. The load actual value is determined from the motor current taking into account the acceleration. The load actual value can also be determined using load measuring equipment (e.g. load measuring pins or boxes) and evaluated by this module.. Nonlinear master controller setpoint The sensor fitted to the master controller supplies a setpoint which is directly proportional to its angle of excursion. To allow the crane operator to make more accurate positioning at slow speeds, the setpoint follows a nonlinear function, and the output characteristic is thus converted into a progressively bent characteristic. This permits fine adjustment even of small speeds. 3. Heavy-duty operation In heavy-duty operation, loads greater than the rated load can occasionally be lifted. However, this is only permissible at reduced speed. In this mode, therefore, the master controller setpoint is multiplied by a selectable factor of <. This results in full utilization of the excursion area with reduced presetting of the setpoint. 4. Position/displacement control Using position control, the drive can approach a preset point with displacement control and time optimization. From a specified point onwards, the speed setpoint is limited according to the displacement. The displacement actual value is available via a pulse generator. 5. Pre-limit switching The function "Pre-limit switching" permits limitation of the speed setpoint to an adjustable speed when the pre-limit switch is run over. This prevents the drive from moving at full speed into the limit switch. 6. Inching operation For inching, an adjustable jogging setpoint is applied as the speed setpoint in order to define small speeds, e.g. for cable changing. 7. Starting pulse To prevent sagging of the load, a constant or loaddependent setpoint is applied to the precontrol input of the speed controller in the hoisting winch. 8. Changeover of rampfunction generator with field weakening and heavy-duty service At the transition into the field weakening region, the rampup time can be extended to prevent moderately rated drives from reaching the current limits. In heavy-duty service, however, the ramp-up time is extended from the beginning, compared to the rated rampup time, and not only when a particular speed is reached. 9. Speed zero signal Speed zero detection for brake control at speeds between 5 and 0 % of rated speed. 0. Control monitoring This function carries out a comparison between speed setpoint and actual value.. Speed actual value monitoring In actual value monitoring, a prerequisite is the presence of two speed actual value generators, for example a normal speed actual value generator and a displacement actual value generator (which also supplies a speed). With hoisting winches, a generator can be fitted at the motor and a generator at the drum. This allows monitoring of the mechanical elements between them (gear breakage monitoring).. Synchro control (master/slave drive) When a load is to be lifted or moved by two hoisting winches or trolleys which are not mechanically coupled, a displacement synchro control between the drives is required. This function is implemented with the synchro control between the two drives as a master/slave drive. 3. Current distribution monitoring (master/ slave drive) With a master/slave drive, current distribution monitoring serves for monitoring the symmetrical current distribution of both motors. 4. Constant field weakening With hoisting winches without load measurement, the speed during lowering can be increased by the square of the efficiency. 5. Slack cable control The slack cable controller can be used to prevent the cable from becoming slack when the grab is closed in the load material. It also ensures that the grab can dig into filling material, thus achieving the maximum degree of filling. 6. Grab displacement control With grab displacement control, the setpoint formed by the position controller is limited via the master controller of the closing winch. To adjust the grab during grab change, a small setpoint is applied via the master controller. 7. Grab adjustment To adjust the grab, the displacement actual values are stored as setpoints for the "opened" and "closed" end points. 8. Synchro control for lifting beam operation During lifting beam operation of the holding and closing winch, the closing winch follows the holding winch with displacement control. 9. Current compensation control During hoisting and lowering of the closed grab, the tensions of the holding and closing cables should be approximately the same. The required hoisting power is optimally distributed over both motors. The current actual values are compared in the current compensation control, and the difference applied to the speed controller of the closing winch. 0. Cactus grab operation In cactus grab operation, the grabs usually require greater tension at the closing cable than at the holding cable. A supplementary circuit in the current equalization controller allows the current to be distributed asymmetrically in the desired ratio. A prerequisite is a corresponding motor design.. Reach-dependent rampup time With cranes with a boom, an increasing reach results in an increase in the load torque for the rotating gear during acceleration. To prevent reaching of the current limits and the resulting error signal, the rampup and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator are adjusted linearly as a function of reach of the boom Siemens HE /3

213 T300 technology software for crane systems Brief description of the functions. Override of ramp-up and down times according to the error signal If an error signal occurs during the acceleration phase, it is possible to continuously optimize the ramp-up times depending on the magnitude of the error signal (tracking of ramp-function generator). 3. Reach-dependent speed of rotation The angular velocit ω = v/r is adjusted as a function of reach of the boom, to keep the circumferential speed constant. 4. Synchro control (master/slave drive) This function is used for cranes with a soft construction for synchronous control of fixed and pendulum supports. Synchronization of the crane running gear at specific intervals is carried out using sensors fitted along the carriageway. Selecting and ordering data Software module/documentation for Order No. Hoisting gear @ Holding gear @ Closing gear @ Slewing gear @ Travelling gear @ Travelling gear (slave drive) @ Module including documentation M Documentation D Documentation, German 0 0 Documentation English 7 6 5/4 Siemens HE. 999

214 he Kap6IVZ.fm Seite Dienstag, 4. Mai 999 :44 4 HIPACanti-sway control 6/ Summary 6/ Swing angle sensing 6/ High performance control algorithms 6/3 High performance computer hardware 6/3 Two additional modes 6/3 Swing-controlled manual operation 6/4 Automatic operation 6/4 Swing angle sensor system 6/4 OPTOMAT line camera 6/5 VEROSWING measuring frame 6/6 Selecting and ordering data 6/6 Features of the individual versions 6/7 Legend of HIPAC versions 6/7 Scope of delivery 6/8 Documentation 6/8 Factors for successful utilization of HIPAC Siemens HE. 999 Cyan Prozeß 75,0 50,0 LPI Magenta Prozeß 5,0 50,0 LPI Gelb Prozeß 0,0 50,0 LPI Schwarz Prozeß 45,0 50,0 LPI 6/

215 HIPAC anti-sway control Summary HIPAC is an electronic open and closed-loop control system which can be integrated in any crane control system as an add-on element. The crane system must have variablespeed drives. HIPAC enables the almost swing-free movement of crane loads, offering the following advantages: Transportation of loads with optimized time Reduction in time required for depositing and picking up the load by means of precise, swing-free approaching of the target position Perfect crane operation, even by an inexperienced operator Care of drive and mechanisms, thanks to optimized torque curves Crane automation with minimum outlay. HIPAC thus allows a considerable increase in the turnover capacity and safety of crane systems. The HIPAC swing control mainly comprises, as main components, the swing angle sensing system, computer hardware and the control algorithms implemented in it. Swing angle sensing The dynamic performance and precision of a swing control system depends decisively on the accuracy and measuring speed of the swing angle sensor. With HIPAC, either the OPTOMAT D line camera or the VEROSWING measuring frame is used for swing angle measurement. The OPTOMAT D line camera used to measured the load swing angle is a compact unit with integral processor. It can be easily installed and requires minimum space. The line camera combines maximum measuring resolution and accuracy with an extremely short measuring rate, even for very great swing lengths. It is therefore eminently suitable for operation on very high cranes, such as container quay cranes. On these cranes, with which the trolley travels at about 35 m above the ground, load position accuracies in the region of a few centimeters can be achieved. By means of the VEROSWING measuring frame the swing angle can be measured even under very unfavorable conditions of visibility, such as in steelworks. The VEROSWING measuring frame is a product made by EUROLASE. It is fully maintenance-free. Since it is a magnetic system and not an optical one, one advantage of this measuring equipment is its insensitivity to dirt of all kinds. Furthermore, the system cannot be blanked out by intense infrared sources such as liquid steel. VEROSWING is therefore primarily used in steelworks. OPTOMAT D line camera VEROSWING measuring frame High performance control algorithms Satisfactory results in the area of electronic swing damping were achieved in the past. A further development of these methods allowed the dynamic performance and precision to be enhanced to such a degree that we now have true anti-sway control. The great advantage lies in direct control of load movement instead of the previous control of the gantry or trolley travelling gear, followed by damping of the resultant load swing. 6/ Siemens HE. 999

216 HIPACanti-sway control Summary High performance computer hardware A prerequisite for using these control algorithms is computer systems with sufficient computing power to process the algorithms in a short cycle time and which are compact as well as compatible with automation systems. This requirement is met by the FM 486, a fast control module which plugs into the SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers. Alternatively, the FM 486 can be installed in a small standalone subrack. This is a possible solution for crane systems which are not equipped with a SIMATIC S5, e.g. crane control in SIMATIC S7 or system from other manufacturer. 3 Two additional modes In conventional operation, the output signals of the master controller represent the speed setpoints for the gantry or trolley. If this type of conventional installation is extended to Swing-controlled manual operation include HIPAC anti-sway control, two additional modes are obtained: the "swing-controlled manual operation" and "automatic operation". 4 5 In swing-controlled manual operation, the trolley or gantry travelling gear is operated manually as previously. However, instead of presetting a speed setpoint for the gantry or trolley travelling gear, for example, with his master controller the crane operator presets a setpoint for the load speed. This considerably simplifies the operating of a crane: the operator need no longer be concerned with controlling the swing. When a movement has ended, the load ceases moving without swinging. 6 Siemens HE /3

217 HIPAC anti-sway control Summary Automatic operation In automatic operation, the higher-level automation system only presets the travel destination for the load as well as the lifting height at which the load is to be transported. With a container quay crane, these are the coordinates of obstacles situated between the starting point and destination point. The HIPAC automatic mode then executes fully automatically all movements of the crane - gentle lifting of the load, hoisting to the required height, swing-free acceleration and deceleration of the trolley or gantry travelling gear, lowering of the load until it is gently deposited. Load movement therefore either follows a rectangular curve (hoisting of the load to the preset height, travel of the trolley and/or gantry travelling gear, lowering of the load at the destination) or, with the container quay crane, an optimized-time space curve. This space curve is used when obstacles situated between the starting point and the destination are known. In this case the HIPAC system is able to compute the optimizedtime curve of the load through space over these obstacles, and execute it. Even the acceleration of the gantry or trolley travelling gear and load reach maximum values in automatic operation by means of precontrol algorithms. Since the hoisting gear speed can also be maximized according to the load, the use of the HIPAC anti-sway control offers optimized loading and unloading from three aspects: Optimized-time space curve ) Optimized-time and torque acceleration of the trolley and gantry travelling gear Load-dependent maximized hoisting gear speed z Load +X 3, Z 8 +X, Z +X, Z Rectangular curve Space curve +X 4, Z 4 +X 3, Z 3 +X z, Z z x AHE-50 Swing angle sensor system OPTOMAT line camera Function The camera unit, comprising a line camera and the spotlights, is installed under the trolley. Fitted to the right and left of the camera are the two halogen spotlights. These beam downward, intensively illuminating the reflector situated on the load lifting equipment. The triple reflector of the load lifting equipment reflects the light directly to the camera. The deflection angle of the load is thus determined via an image evaluation computer integrated in the camera. The swing angle actual value is output as a 4 to 0 ma signal. Optical angle measurement has the following advantages and disadvantages compared to magnetic measurement by means of a measuring frame. Advantages Highly accurate load positioning because the measurement is made with high resolution directly at the load or load lifting equipment (spreader, lifting beam etc.). Very good control quality, even with load lifting equipment with low weight. Automatic discounting of any superimposed rotary oscillation of the load lifting equipment. This rotary oscillation is created by unequal load distribution, by impact of the load on obstacles or by strong gusts of wind at an inclined angle. These rotary oscillations can not and, usually should not be equalized. They must therefore not be measured for anti-sway control. Mounting of the reflector on the center line of the load lifting equipment prevents this automatically. Disadvantages Severe build-up of dirt can cover the reflector. This may necessitate regular cleaning. Intense infrared radiation from below (e.g. liquid steel) dazzles the camera. One camera system measures the swing in only one horizontal direction. ) Only with HIPAC for container dock cranes 6/4 Siemens HE. 999

218 HIPACanti-sway control Swing sensor system VEROSWING measuring frame Function The VEROSWING measuring frame is fitted under the crane trolley. One of the stationary ropes of the crane goes through the frame. A magnet is fixed to this rope at the height of the frame. The frame contains Hall-effect sensors which register the movement of the magnet and, therefore, of the rope within the frame. Magnetic swing angle measurement has the following advantages and disadvantages compared to optical measurement. Advantages The measuring frame is not an optical measuring system; this means reliable operation even under poor ambient conditions and a severely polluted environment. Both horizontal components are measured simultaneously. Adjustment and startup are carried out in a simple manner. Disadvantages The measuring frame must encompass a stationary rope. Such a rope must therefore be present and have sufficient clearance from adjacent cables at all hoisting heights, so that the measuring frame cannot be trapped. The measuring frame must not encompass any other rope apart from the stationary rope. If the load lifting equipment (e.g. hook) is too light compared to the rope weight, the ropes can bend during movement. Since, using the measuring frame, the position of the load is determined from rope deflection, errors occur here which can result in improper operating responses and even instability in extreme cases. This problem is exacerbated with larger hoisting heights of the crane (more than about 8 m). Load lifting equipment of unfavorable design can change the rope movement compared to pure swing movement thus resulting in a deterioration of operating behavior, similarly to the bent rope effect. If the load itself can make rotary oscillations around its point of gravity, these undesirable quantities are also measured. This impairs the operating behavior and applies both to rotary oscillation around a horizontal axis and around a vertical axis. Note: An electronic filter in HIPAC filters out the unwanted rope vibration measured on the ropes. This also applies to the effects of parasitic rotary oscillation of the load, as long as their frequency is not too low Siemens HE /5

219 HIPAC anti-sway control Selecting and ordering data Features of the individual versions HIPAC swing control is available in different versions. When selecting the suitable version for a particular application, the features listed in the following table should be observed. Version Container quay crane with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S5 Container quay crane with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S7 Grab crane (ship s unloading crane) with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S5 Grab crane (ship s unloading crane) with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S7 Gantry crane with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S5 Gantry crane with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S7 Gantry crane, manual operation only, for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S5 Gantry crane, manual operation only, for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S7 Gantry crane, manual operation only, for cranes not controlled by SIMATIC No. of horizontal axes with antisway control Swing angle sensor system Interface for crane control Camera FM 486 insert in S5-5U ) -35U -55U Camera FM486 insert in small subrack AS 930 with PROFIBUS connection to SIMATIC S7 none FM 486 insert in S5-5U ) -35U -55U none FM486 insert in small subrack AS 930 with PROFIBUS connection to SIMATIC S7 VEROSWING ) FM 486 insert in S5-5U ) -35U -55U VEROSWING ) FM486 insert in small subrack AS 930 with PROFIBUS connection to SIMATIC S7 VEROSWING ) FM 486 insert in S5-5U ) -35U -55U VEROSWING ) FM486 insert in small subrack AS 930 with PROFIBUS connection to SIMATIC S7 VEROSWING ) FM486 insert in small subrack AS 930, hardware interlocking with crane control Order No. Possible options 6GA7 00-5KA0-Z X0, X0, X03 X0 6GA7 00-7KA0-Z X0, X0, X03, X0 6GA7 00-5XA0-Z X0 6GA7 00-7XA0-Z X0 6GA7 00-5VA0-Z X04, X05, X06, X08, X09, X0 6GA7 00-7VA0-Z X04, X05, X06, X08, X09, X0 6GA7 00-5VH0-Z X06, X08, X09, X0 6GA7 00-7VH0-Z X06, X08, X09, X0 6GA7 00-0VH0-Z X07, X08, X09, X0 ) Camera sensor system on request ) Only possible with CPU 945 6/6 Siemens HE. 999

220 HIPACanti-sway control Selecting and ordering data Legend for HIPAC versions 6 G A Z HIPAC anti-sway control Crane control system 0 = without SIMATIC 0 5 = for SIMATIC S5 5 7 = for SIMATIC S7 7 Swing angle sensor system K = Camera K V = VEROSWING V X = none X Mode A = automatic A H = manual H Number of horizontal axes = one axis = two axes Development release Codes Meaning X0 Camera control electronics in IP 65 high-grade steel cabinet instead of IP 00 on fitted mounting plate X0 Transfer of trolley position and swing angle via PROFIBUS instead of pulse/analog signals X03 Function block package for SIMATIC S5-35U/55U: Target presetting for vertical, horizontal and cyclic loading/unloading for container quay cranes ("self-teaching automatic system") X04 Interface to laser sensor system for absolute position detection of trolley and/or gantry travelling gear for non-profibus-compatible distance measuring lasers (Messrs. LASE, DI 00, 60, 300) X05 Interface to laser sensor system for absolute position detection of trolley and/or gantry travelling gear for PROFIBUS-compatible distance measuring lasers X06 Function block package for SIMATIC S5/S7: Drive and HIPAC control with Control via PROFIBUS, Brake control, HIPAC control, Data transfer between T300 module of the hoisting gear and HIPAC. Processing of the operational and prelimit switch and overload, Function module "Gentle lifting and depositing of the load", Jogging operation function (The exact designation of the SIMATIC in use must be specified on the order.) X07 HIPAC electronic in IP 65 high-grade steel cabinet instead of on the IP 00 fitted mounting plate X08 Additional permanent magnets for VEROSWING for fitting on the stationary cable ( units) X09 Supporting and protection arm for mounting the VEROSWING frame X0 Documentation in English instead of German Scope of delivery A HIPAC system is supplied with: HIPAC set of p.c.b. modules HIPAC software (loaded into FM 486 controller module) Swing angle sensor system ) (camera or VEROSWING) Isolation amplifier Power supply Cable loom PC software for service purposes Installation-specific components such as the following are not supplied with HIPAC: Pulse generators Absolute value encoders Limit switches Detailed parts lists of the individual HIPAC versions can be found in the HIPAC configuring manual. In addition to the above versions, functional options such as load skew angle measurement for depositing the load in the desired direction, or laser sensing for detecting obstacles, are in development. The same applies to an innovative camera sensor system for swing angle measurement in two axes as an alternative to the VEROSWING measuring frame. Details are available on request. ) Not with the version for "Grab crane (ship s unloading crane) auto. operation". Siemens HE /7

221 HIPAC anti-sway control Selecting and ordering data Documentation A set of operating instructions in German is supplied as standard for each HIPAC system ordered. Additional operating instructions can be ordered using the following Order Nos.: Operating instructions for version Container quay crane with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S5 Container quay crane with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S7 Grab crane (ship s unloading crane) with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S5 Grab crane (ship s unloading crane) with auto. operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S7 Gantry cranes with auto. operation or only manual operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S5 Gantry cranes with auto. operation or only manual operation for cranes controlled by SIMATIC S7 Gantry cranes, manual operation only, for cranes not controlled by SIMATIC The HIPAC configuring manual provides in-depth knowledge on using the system, its Order No. German 6GA7 00-5CA00 6GA7 00-7CA00 6GA7 00-5GA00 6GA7 00-7GA00 6GA7 00-5BA00 6GA7 00-7BA00 6GA7 00-0BH00 method of operation as well as configuring, dimension drawings and parts lists. Order No. English 6GA7 00-5CA76 6GA7 00-7CA76 6GA7 00-5GA76 6GA7 00-7GA76 6GA7 00-5BA76 6GA7 00-7BA76 6GA7 00-0BH76 Configuring manuals Order No. Order No. German English HIPAC configuring manual 6GA7 00-0PH00 6GA7 00-0PH76 Factors for successful utilization of HIPAC The successful utilization of Mechanical arrangement of HIPAC mainly depends on the the crane and load lifting following factors: equipment (spreader, grab, Correct selection of the hooks, clamp, electromag- swing angle sensor in net, etc.) accordance with the oper- Fitting the swing angle ating and ambient condi- sensor at a suitable point tions Correct integration of the HIPAC system in crane control These points are explained in detail in the configuring manual. For first-time users, a personal consultation with our technical department is essential. 6/8 Siemens HE. 999

222 he KapAIVZ.fm Seite Montag, 0. Mai 999 3:3 5 Appendix A/ Subject Index A/4 Ordering Data Index A/5 Companies and Representatives in Europe A/6 Companies and Representatives Worldwide A/8 Year-000 compliance A/8 Conditions of Sale and Delivery Siemens HE. 999 Cyan Prozeß 75,0 50,0 LPI Magenta Prozeß 5,0 50,0 LPI Gelb Prozeß 0,0 50,0 LPI Schwarz Prozeß 45,0 50,0 LPI A/

223 Appendix Subject Index Page A Abnormal winding / Accessories 3/56, 4/8 Add-on options /50 Add-on parts 4/3 Anti-condensation heating /6, /39, /49 Approvals 3/6 Automatic operation 6/4 B Balance quality /4, /3 Basic board 3/4 Bearing assignments of motors LT8 /5 Bearing assignments of motors LT9 /4 Bearings /5, /4, /50 Braking energy and energy capacity /53 Braking energy for emergency shutdown /53 Braking torque adjustment /39 Braking torque /53 Brushgear / Built-in elements 4/8 C Cactus grab operation 5/3 Cam disc 4/4 Cast-iron resistor elements 3PY6 0 3/40 Changeover of ramp-function generator with field weakening and heavy-duty service 5/3 Characteristics 3/5 Classes of fit /8, /45 Climatic resistance /6, /40, /55, 3/50, 3/60, 4/, 4/4, 4/49 Coating /5, /50 Condensate drain holes /3 Connecting the cables 3/5 Constant field weakening 5/3 Contactors /3, 4/4 Control characteristics 3/30, 3/3 Control column 4/7 Control equipment 4/ Control monitoring 5/3 Control monitors 4/49 Converters /3 Coupling /5 Crane controller 4/7 Crane operator seat 4/7 Current compensation control 5/3 Current distribution monitoring (master/slave drive) 5/3 Cyclic duration factor /9 D Damping spring 3/65 DC motors GG5/6, H.5 /3 Degree of protection /3, /38, /50, 3/30 Differential limit switch 4/ Double master controller 3SJ3 4/ Drive block 4/3 Dynamic balancing /4 Page E Effective value calculation /9 Effects of coolant temperature /7 Effects of site altitude /7 ELDRO brake operators 3/60 ELDRO units, normal version 3/7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4/5 Emergency release /5 F Fitting of digital encoders 4/4 Fitting of potentiometers 4/4 Friction brake 4/4 G Grab adjustment 5/3 Grab differential limit switch 3SJ6 4/, 4/ Grab displacement control 5/3 H Heating 3/64 Heavy-duty service 5/3 High performance computer hardware 6/3 High performance control algorithms 6/ High-speed switching module /5 HIPAC anti-sway control 6/ Hoisting gear technology module 3/4 Housing feet / I Increased anti-corrosion protection 3/6 Inquiry and order sheet 4/3 Inquiry and order sheet 4/34 Inquiry and order sheet 3 4/36 Inquiry and order sheet 3. 4/38 Inquiry and order sheet 3. 4/39 Installation 3/5, 4/3 Insulation /4, /, /39, /49 Intermittent duty with effect of the starting process (S4) /8 Intermittent duty with effect of the starting process and electrical braking (S5) /8 Intermittent duty without the effect of the starting process (S3) /7 J Jogging operation 5/3 L Lifting valve 3/63 Limit switches 3/63 Load-dependent field weakening 5/3 Loading values as a function of coolant temperature and site altitude 3/7 Long-stroke units 3/66 Lowering valve 3/63 A/ Siemens HE. 999

224 Appendix Page M Maintenance 3/64, 4/3 Master controllers 4/ Maximum permissible speed /3, /50 Mechanical brake release /39 Method of operation in standard brakes 3/64 Microswitch /5 Motor design /6 Motor protection /5 Motors / Mounting facilities - double master controllers and setpoint generators 4/9 Mounting position 3/6 N Nonlinear master controller setpoint 5/3 Normal stacking 3/4, 3/5 Normal winding / Notes on mounting 3/64 O Operating fluid 3/6 Operating spring 3/64 Operating voltage /38, /49 Opto-electronic encoder 6GA /6 OPTOMAT line camera 6/4 Override of ramp-up and down times according to the error signal 5/4 P Position/displacement control 5/3 Power section 3/4 Pre-limit switching 5/3 PTC thermistor detectors /, /49 Pulse generator 6GA465-6AC 3/7 R Radio interference /6 Rating plates /3 Reach-dependent ramp-up time 5/3 Reach-dependent speed of rotation 5/4 Replaceability of older types of motor /3 Resistor grids 3PY6 3/5 Resistor units 3/9 Rolling bearings /4 Rotating crane controller 3SJ9 30 4/7 S Service life 4/4 Setpoint generator for variable-speed drives 4/8 Setpoint module 6GA465-6AA 3/6, 3/8 Shaft ends /5, /, /38, /50 Short-stroke units 3/66 Short-time duty (S) /7 SIMOTRAS HE tester 6GA465-6AD 3/9 SIMOTRAS HE three-phase power controller 3/ Site altitude /7 Sizes 00 to 3 /4 Sizes 60 to 00 /5 Subject Index Page Slack cable control 5/3 Sliprings / Spare parts 3/56, 3/88, 4/9, 4/4 Speed actual value monitoring 5/3 Speed pulse generators 3/ Speed zero signal 5/3 Spring return 4/4 Squirrel cage motors LA /3 Standards and regulations / Starting pulse 5/3 Surface mounted switch 4/3 Swing angle sensing 6/ Swing angle sensor system 6/4 Swing-controlled manual operation 6/3 Switchgear 4/ Switching lever 4/3 Synchro control (master/slave drive) 5/3, 5/4 Synchro control for lifting beam operation 5/3 System components 3/ T T300 technology module /3 Tacho mounting /, /38 Tacho-module 6GA465-6AB 3/3, 3/8 Temperature classes /4 Temperature /7 Terminal box /, /38, /50 Test mode 4/5 Thermistor protection /38, /39 Three-phase servomotors PA6 /3 Three-phase slipring motors LT9 and LT8 /0 Three-phase slipring motors LV9 with brake /37 Three-phase squirrel cage motors LD9/8 with fitted brake /49 Time-displacement diagrams for short-stroke units 3/67 Tolerances of dimensions /7 Tolerances /, /45 Torque control 3/4 Two-track pulse generator 6GA465-6AC 3/ Types /3, /, /38, /50 V Variable-speed operation 3/4 Ventilation /5 VEROSWING measuring frame 6/5 Vibration severity /4 W Water drain holes /3 Wire-wound potentiometer 6KA9 94 4/9 Wiring 4/ A Siemens HE. 999 A/3

225 Appendix Order No. index Order No. Page GG5/6 /3 H.5 /3 LA /3 LD8 /50, /58, /60 LD9 /49 - /50, /56 - /58 LD9/8 / LT8 /, /0 - /, /5, /9, /, /3 - /6, /3 - /35 LT9 /, /0 - /, /4, /8, /0, /, /5 - /3 LV9 /, /40 - /44, /46, /47 LY7 /36, /48 LY8 /36, /48 LY9 /36, /48 PA6 /3 LL5 3/60-3/6, 3/64, 3/66, 3/67, 3/68, 3/69, 3/70-3/88 3LF 4/3 3NC8 3/8-3/ 3NE8 3/8, 3/0 3PP 3/30, 3/3-3/38 3PR3 3/30, 3/39-3/49 Order No. Page 3PS3 3/30, 3/50-3/59 3PY6 3/35, 3/37, 3/38, 3/40, 3/47, 3/48, 3/5, 3/56, 3/57 3PX6 3/46, 3/47, 3/56 3PX9 4/4 3RT 4/4, 4/43, 4/45, 4/47 3SB 4/3 3SJ3 4/ - 4/ 3SJ6 4/, 4/ - 4/6 3SJ9 4/7-4/4 3SX4 4/9, 4/4 3SY4 4/4 3TF 4/4 3TF5 4/43, 4/45, 4/47 3TF6 4/43, 4/45, 4/47 6GA4 3/8, 3/0, 3/ - 3/, 3/7, 3/8, 4/4, 4/ 6-4/8, 4/, 4/3, 4/49-4/54, 5/4 6GA7 6/6-6/8 6KA9 4/4, 4/9, 4/9, 4/, 4/3 6SE70/7 /3 6SG6 3/0, 3/ SKKT 3/0, 3/ A/4 Siemens HE. 999

226 Appendix Companies and Representatives in Europe Albania BINDI sh. p. k. Tirana Armenia Representative of Siemens AG Yerevan Austria Siemens AG Österreich Wien Bregenz Deutschlandsberg Eisenstadt Graz Innsbruck Klagenfurt Klosterneuburg Linz Salzburg St. Pölten Villach Azerbaijan Representative of SIMKO AS Baku Belgium Siemens S. A. Bruxelles Antwerpen Boussu Colfontaine Dilsen-Stokkem Gent Haasrode Herentals Huizingen Liège Namur Oostkamp Zaventem Bulgaria Siemens AG Representative in Bulgaria Sofia Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) Siemens GmbH Moskau Moskau Barnaul Jakutsk Jekaterinburg Jrkutsk Jshewsk Kaluga Krasnodar Nowosibirsk Perm St. Petersburg Tbilissi Tjumen Tomsk Ufa Wladiwostok Croatia Siemens d.d. Zagreb Cyprus GEVO Ltd. Nicosia Czech Republic Siemens s.r.o. Praha Brno Dinín Sthíbro Trutnov Denmark Siemens A/S Ballerup Alborg Brønshøj Esbjerg Hedensted Højbjerg Odense Skensved Tåstrup Vejle Eire (Irland) Siemens Ltd. Dublin Estonia AS Siemens Tallinn Finland Siemens Osakeyhtiö Espoo Helsinki France Siemens S. A. S. Saint-Denis Bihorel Caluire-et-Cuire Cesson Sévigné Dijon Haguenau La Garenne Colombes La-Suze-sur-Sarthe Lesquin Les Ulis Lissess Lormont Marseille Mérignac Metz Montrouge Molsheim Nanterre Nantes Nice Pantin Paris La Défense Reims Saint-Denis Saint-Quentin Strasbourg Toulouse Georgia Representative of Siemens AG Tbilisi Great Britain Siemens plc Bracknell Beeston Belfast Bellshill Birmingham Bristol Camberley Cambridge Chessington Christchurch Clevedon Corby Congleton Crawley Cumbernauld East Kilbridge Fareham Glasgow Hemel Hempstead Hounslow Ilford Isle of Wight London Luton Manchester Milton Keynes Newcastle-upon-Tyne Oldham Oxford Poole Purley Romsey Telford Wellingborough Wembley Greece Siemens A. E. Athen, Amaroussio Acharnes Thessaloniki Vassiliko Evias Hungary Siemens Rt. Budapest Bicske Cegled Szombathely Iceland Smith & Nordland HF Reykjavik Italy Siemens S. p. A. Milano Bari Bologna Brescia Cagliari Casoria Cassina de Pecchi Fanglia Firenze Genova Napoli Padova Palermo Pescara Roma Torino Verona Lativa Siemens S/A Riga Lithuania Lietuvos ELTIKA Vilnius Klaipeda Luxemburg Siemens S. A. Luxembourg-Hamm Macedonia SITAI d.o.o. Skopje Malta J.R.D. SYSTEMS Ltd. Harun Moldavia Siemens s.r.l. Chisinau Netherlands Siemens Nederland N. V. Den Haag Alphen a/d Rijn Zoetermeer Norway Siemens A/S Oslo Fyllingsdalen Trondheim Poland Siemens Sp.z.o.o. Warszawa Gdañsk-Wrzeszcz Katowice Kratów Poznap Wroclaw Portugal Siemens S. A. Lissboa Amadora Albufeira Carnaxide Coimbra Evora Loures Matosinhos Codex Mem Martins Seixal Romania Siemens birou de consultatii tehnice Bucurexti Slatina Slovak Republic Siemens s.r.o. Bratislava Dolný Kubin Horná Streda Michalovce Nitra Nové Zámky Trnava Slowenia Siemens d.o.o. Ljubljana Kranj Maribor Spain Siemens S. A. Bilbao Cornellá de Llobregat Gijoñ La Coruña Las Palmas de Gran Canaria León Málaga Murcia Palma de Mallorca Santa Cruz de Tenerife Sevilla Tres Cantos (Madrid) Valencia Vallodolid Vigo Zaragoza Sweden Siemens AB Upplands Väsby Göteborg Haninge Jönköping Kista Malmö Solna Sundsvall Switzerland Siemens Schweiz AG Zürich Adliswil Basel Bioggio Bronschhofen Dietikon-Fahrweid Fahrweid Winterthur-Töss Turkey SIMKO Ticaret ve Sanayi A.S. Findikli Istanbul Adana Alsancak-Izmir Ayazag-Istanbul Bexiktax-Istanbul Bursa Cerkezköy-Tekikdag Kartal-Istanbul Kavaklidere-Ankara Mecidiyeköy-Istanbul Mudanya Samsun Ukraine Representative of Siemens AG Kiew Charkiw Odessa Wischgorod White Russia Representative of Siemens AG Minsk Yugoslawia Siemens d.o.o. Beograd A Siemens HE. 999 A/5

227 Appendix Companies and Representatives Worldwide Africa Algeria Siemens Bureau d Alger Hydra Angola Escritório de Representacão da Siemens em Angola Luanda Botswana Siemens (Pty) Ltd. Gaborone Iwaneng Congo SOFAMATEL S.P.R.L. Kinshasa Côte d Ivoire Siemens AG S.A.R.L. Abidjan Egypt Siemens Limited Cairo-Mohandessin Smouha Alexandria Centech Cairo-Zamalek Ethiopia Siemens (Pvt) Addis Abeba Ghana Impromex ACCRA Accra Guinea André & Cie. S. A. Lausanne Kenia Siemens Communications Ltd. Nairobi Lesotho Range Telecommunication Systems (Pty) Ltd Maseru Libya Siemens A. G. Branch Libya Tripoli Malawi Ecolectric Ltd. Blantyre Mauritius Ireland Blyth Ltd Port Louis Morocco SETEL Société Electrotechnique et de Télécommunication S. A. Casablanca Mosambique Siemens Limitada Maputo Namibia Siemens (Pty.) Ltd. Windhoek Nigeria Siemens Limited Lagos Abuja Kaduna Republic of South Africa Siemens Ltd. Halfway House Centurion Isando Pretoria Springs Woodmead Sudan National Electrical Commercial Co. Khartoum Swaziland Siemens (Pty) Ltd Matsapha Tansania Tanzania Electrical Services Ltd. Dar-es-Salaam Tunesia Siemens Bureau de Liaison Tunis Zambia Siemens (Z) Ltd. Kitwe Lusaka Zimbabwe Siemens (Pvt.) Ltd. Harare Alexandra Park America Argentinia Siemens S. A. Buenos Aires San Martin Bahia Blanca Córdoba Las Heras Mar del Plata Rosario Boulogne sur Mer Bolivia Sociedad Comercial é Industrial Hansa Ltda. La Paz Brazil Siemens Ltda. Sao Paulo Belo Horizonte Brasilia Campinas Curitiba Florianópolis Fortaleza Fravatai Jaboatao dos Guararapes Jundiai Manaus Pôrto Alegre Ribeirao Preto Rio de Janeiro Salto Salvador S. Bernado do Campo Vila Sao Joao Canada Siemens Canada Limited Mississanga Ajax Brampton Burnaby Calgary Cambridge Clatham Dartmouth Drummondville Edmonton Kanata London Moncton Montreal Mount Pearl Ottawa Pointe Claire Saçkatoon Sherbrooke Tilbury Vanier Windsor Winnipeg Chile Siemens S.A. Santiago de Chile Colombia Siemens S. A. Santafé de Bogotá Barranquilla Cali-Occidente Medellin Costa Rica Siemens S. A. San José Cuba EUMEDA Representación Consultiva de Siemens Electromedicina Ciudad de la Habana Curaçao SANTRACO N. V. Willemstad Dominican Republic Electromédica S. A. Santo Domingo Ecuador Siemens S. A. Quito Guayaquil El Salvador Siemens S. A. San Salvador Guatemala Siemens S. A. Ciudad de Guatemala Honduras Representaciones Electroindustriales S. de R.L. San Pedro Sula Tegucigalpa Jamaica Meditron Ltd. Kingston Martinique Périé Medical Fort-de-France Mexico Siemens S A de CV México, D.F. Aguascalientes Apodaca Chihuahua Cd. Juárez Culiacán Gómez Palacio Hermosillo León Mérida Puebla San Juan Cuautlancingo Tijuana Tlajomulco de Zuniga Veracruz Villa Corregidora Nicaragua Siemens S. A. Managua Panama Siemens S. A. Panama Paraguay Rieder & Cia. S. A. C. I. Asunción Peru Siemens S. A. Lima Trinidad and Tobago Biomedical Technologies Ltd. St. Augustin United States of America Siemens Corporation New York Allentown Alpharetta Arlington Atlanta Auburn Hills Boca Raton Bridgewater Brooklyn Park Camarillo Charlotte Columbus Concord Cupertino Danvers Duluth Fountain Inn Gainsville Hickory Hoffman Estates Issaguah Iselin Johnson City Lake Oswego Lima Milwaukee Newport News Norcross Oklahoma City Palo Alto Piscataway Princeton Richardson Richland Sacramento Santa Clara Santa Fe Springs San Jose Sunnyvale Totawa Washington Wendell Uruguay Conatel S.A. Montevido Venezuela Siemens S. A. Caracas Barcelona Maracaibo Perto Ordaz Valencia A/6 Siemens HE. 999

228 Appendix Companies and Representatives Worldwide A Siemens HE. 999 A/7

229 Appendix Year-000 compliance The date change at the end of the millennium will affect not only DP systems but also products, systems and installations being used in the field of automation and drive technology. Apart from the hardware and software components, the application programs which process the date will especially be affected by the changeover. For our automation products and systems, we in the Siemens Automation & Drives Group have given top priority to finding ways of smoothing the way into the next millennium. We are making detailed investigations into the behavior of our products, applying the internationally recognized test profiles of the British Standards Institution. The results of these investigations can be found in our Year 000 product database under the following internet address: year000. Defects in the functioning of individual products, systems or the whole plant may occur as a result of the changeover. These can be due to constellations resulting from a specific combination of products and systems and from individual adaptation and/or expansion of the products and systems. If you have any questions on this matter, please contact your local Siemens office. Conditions of Sale and Delivery Outside Germany Subject to the General Conditions of Supply and Delivery for Products and Services of the Electrical and Electronic Industry and to any other conditions agreed upon with the recipients of catalogs. 7 The technical data, dimensions and weights are subject to change unless otherwise stated on the individual pages of this catalog. The illustrations are for reference only. We reserve the right to adjust the prices and shall charge the prices applying on the date of delivery. A 9.9a Issued by: Automation and Drives Group (A&D) Motion Control Systeme P.O. Box 369 D-9050 Erlangen Germany Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Responsible for Technical contents: Heinrich Lang, Bernard Hennequin Siemens AG, A&D MC PM, Erlangen, Germany General editing: Siemens AG, A&D PT 5, Erlangen, Germany Order No.: E000-K300-A0-A-7600 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany KG K E 8 En